Yamaha DGX660B Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: DGX660B

Categorie: Synthesizer

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

Owner’s Manual

Keyboard Stand Assembly

For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions

on page 12 of this manual.

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Piano!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and

convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place

for future reference.

Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 5–6.

Setting UpReferenceAppendix Basic Guide

DGX-660

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply

(adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or

adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name

plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.

WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where any-

one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or con-

necting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not

recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum

wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller

the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied

or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a

cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instruc-

tions that accompany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct

at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to

change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obli-

gation to update existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and

headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound

levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate

for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is

uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the

ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory

mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as

optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be

dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches

are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well

secured BEFORE using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No

other uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to

how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as

designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and

are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual

carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and

environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products

and the production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we

want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which

(if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type

of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the

replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of

these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being

charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for

the battery being charged.

When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and

never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed

correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in over-

heating and battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all

batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly

and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any

retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery dis-

posal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some

reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please

observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the

disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If

your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha

directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The

model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are

located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below

and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP (bottom)

For DGX-660

DGX-660

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifica-

tions not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your author-

ity, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories

and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.

Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void

your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with

the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class

"B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements pro-

vides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this

product in a residential environment will not result in harmful

interference with other electronic devices. This equipment gen-

erates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual, may

cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic

devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee

that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product

is found to be the source of interference, which can be deter-

mined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected

by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker

or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change

the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute

this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate

retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Elec-

tronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park,

CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distrib-

uted by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

For AC adaptor and DGX-660

For DGX-660

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Piano

Model Name : DGX-660

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA

CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and main-

tenance (servicing) instructions in the liter-

ature accompanying the product.

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accor-

dance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

amplifiers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,

and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tri-

pod, bracket, or table specified by

the manufacturer, or sold with the

apparatus. When a cart is used,

use caution when moving the

cart/apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused for long periods of

time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Ser-

vicing is required when the apparatus has been dam-

aged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is

damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen

into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to

rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has

been dropped.

(UL60065_03)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

For AC adaptor

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.

(can_b_01)

(fcc_sengen)

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

For AC adaptor

WARNING

• This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic instruments. Do

not use for any other purpose.

• Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments.

CAUTION

• When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If some

trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch of the

instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor

is connected to the AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the

minimum level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not using

the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall

AC outlet.

For DGX-660

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the

following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also,

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on

it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage

is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 91) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in

damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument

or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses)

containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as

water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the

power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified

Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall

over and cause a fire.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch

and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected

by Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

Power supply/AC adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

DMI-5 1/2

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold

the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for

extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process.

Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in

damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• When transporting or moving the instrument, always use two or more people.

Attempting to lift the instrument by yourself may damage your back, result in

other injury, or cause damage to the instrument itself.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage

to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily

accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power

switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is

turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When

you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power

cord from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it, use the

provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal

components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,

set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and

gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the

desired listening level.

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or

keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the

instrument or other property, or operational failure.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing

loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a

physician.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level.

When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Power supply/AC adaptor

Assembly

Location

Connections

Handling caution

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

DMI-5 2/2

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the

notices below.

 Handling

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane

Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day)

to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° –

40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

 Maintenance

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft and dry/slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemical-

impregnated wiping cloths.

• During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the

wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any water off immediately with a soft cloth.

 Saving data

• Some of the data of this instrument (page 52) are retained when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may be lost due to some failure, an

operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto USB flash drive/an external device such as a computer (page 76). For information about the

handling of USB flash drive, refer to page 80.

• The recorded Songs are lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. This also occurs when the power is turned off by the Auto Power Off function

(page 19). Save the data to the instrument, or to USB flash drive/an external device such as a computer (page 76). However, the data saved to the

instrument may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto USB flash drive/an external device such as a

computer (page 76). For information about the handling of USB flash drive, refer to page 80.

• To protect against data loss through USB flash drive damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto spare USB flash drive or an external

device such as a computer as backup data.

Information

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal

use.

• This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others' copyrights.

Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually

the same or very similar to those in the product.

* The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score

data, etc.

* You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha

Corporation is not required in such cases.

 About functions/data bundled with the instrument

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

 About this manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your

instrument.

• Apple, iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be

found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit.

You should note this serial number in the space provided below and

retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid

identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom_en_01)

The name plate is located on the bottom of the unit.

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

About Manuals

This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.

 Included Documents

Owner’s Manual (this book)

• Setting Up Please read this section first.

• Basic Guide This section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while

playing the instrument.

• Reference This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various functions of the

instrument.

• Appendix This section includes troubleshooting information and specifications.

Data List

Contains various important preset content lists such as those of Voices, Styles, and Effects.

 Online Materials (from Yamaha Downloads)

MIDI Reference

Contains MIDI related information such as MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart.

MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Contains basic explanations about MIDI.

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such as an iPhone, iPad, etc.

Computer-related Operations

Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transfer-

ring files and MIDI data.

To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads, enter the model name for searching the desired files.

 Online Material (for Yamaha Online members)

Song Book (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Over View Demo Song and Songs 1–11) of

this instrument. After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download this

Song Book free of charge.

Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet “Online Member Product Registration” packaged with this man-

ual in order to fill out the User Registration form.

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual (this book)

• Data List

• Keyboard Stand (page 12)

• Footswitch (page 21)

• Music Rest

• AC Adaptor

• Warranty

• Online Member Product Registration

*1: May not be included depending on your particular locale.

Check with your Yamaha dealer.

*2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you

fill out the User Registration form.

Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/

Insert the music rest

into the slots as shown.

Music Rest

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

About Manuals .................................................................8

Included Accessories .......................................................8

Compatible Format.........................................................10

Special Features 11

Setting Up

Keyboard Stand Assembly 12

Panel Controls and Terminals 16

Front Panel.....................................................................16

Rear Panel .....................................................................17

Setting Up 18

Power Requirements......................................................18

Turning the Power On/Off ..............................................18

Setting the Volume.........................................................19

Auto Power Off Function ................................................19

Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment

(PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) .........................................20

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack).....................21

Connecting a Pedal Unit (PEDAL UNIT jack).................22

MAIN Display 23

Basic Controls 24

Basic Guide

Enjoying Piano Performance (Piano Room) 25

Playing a Piano Performance in the Piano Room ..........25

Recording your Performance as Audio in the Piano Room

...26

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 27

Selecting a Main Voice...................................................27

Playing the “Grand Piano” (Piano Reset).......................27

Layering Two Voices—Dual Voice.................................28

Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ....................28

Using the Metronome .....................................................29

Adding Harmony ............................................................31

Playing Styles 32

Using the Music Database .............................................33

Chords............................................................................34

Using the Smart Chord feature ......................................35

Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance

(Style Recommender) ................................................37

Playing Songs and Audio Files 38

Listening to the Overview Demo ....................................38

Playing Back a Song or Audio File.................................39

Fast Forward, Rewind, and Pause.................................40

A-B Repeat.....................................................................40

Turning Each Track On/Off ............................................40

Displaying the Song Score.............................................41

Displaying the Lyrics ......................................................41

Using the Song Lesson Feature 42

Three Types of Song Lesson .........................................42

Practicing with Song Lesson ..........................................42

Making Practice Perfect—Repeat & Learn.....................43

Recording Your Performance 44

Song Recording .............................................................44

Recording to a Specified Track ......................................46

Clearing a User Song.....................................................48

Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song................48

Audio Recording.............................................................49

Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 50

Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory

....50

Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory

...51

Backup Parameters and Initialization 52

Backup Parameters........................................................52

Initialization ....................................................................52

Reference

Handy Performance Features 53

Selecting a Reverb Type................................................53

Selecting a Chorus Type................................................53

Selecting a DSP Type ....................................................54

Panel Sustain.................................................................55

Pitch Controls—Transpose ............................................55

Pitch Controls—Tuning ..................................................56

Pitch Controls—the PITCH BEND wheel .......................56

Touch Response Sensitivity...........................................57

Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ..................57

Setting the Output Gain Level........................................58

Speaker On/Off Setting ..................................................58

Intelligent Acoustic Control (IAC) ...................................59

Voice Settings 60

Selecting a Dual Voice ...................................................60

Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................60

Voice Editing ..................................................................60

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 61

Style Variations—Sections.............................................61

Changing the Tempo .....................................................63

Adjusting the Volume of the Style ..................................63

Playing Chords Without Style Playback

(Stop Accompaniment) ..............................................63

Setting the Split Point.....................................................64

Setting the Chord Fingering ...........................................64

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............65

Song and Audio Settings 66

Background Music (BGM) Playback ..............................66

Random Playback..........................................................66

Tempo Setting of the Song ............................................67

Song Volume .................................................................67

Audio Volume.................................................................67

Changing the Voice of the Song ....................................68

Specifying the Channel for the Lesson Part...................68

Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with

Your Performance 69

Connecting a Microphone ..............................................69

Selecting a Preset Setting..............................................70

Making and Saving the Microphone Settings.................70

Calling Up the Microphone Settings Saved to USER.....71

The Functions 72

Function List...................................................................73

Connections

– Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 76

Connecting an Audio Device (AUX IN jack)...................76

Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal)....76

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad (USB TO DEVICE,

USB TO HOST terminals)..........................................77

Wireless LAN Settings ...................................................77

USB Flash Drive Operations 80

Connecting a USB Flash Drive ......................................81

Formatting a USB Flash Drive .......................................82

Saving a Registration Memory to USB Flash Drive .......83

Saving a User Song to USB Flash Drive........................84

Converting a User Song to an Audio file ........................85

Loading Files from a USB Flash Drive ...........................86

Deleting files from a USB Flash Drive............................87

Deleting User Data from the Instrument.........................87

Appendix

Troubleshooting........................................................... 88

Messages...................................................................... 89

Specifications............................................................... 90

Index.............................................................................. 92

Table of Contents

Basic GuideReferenceAppendix Setting Up

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Compatible Format

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compati-

ble music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of

manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM

System Level.

The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater function-

ality and open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics

when an XF file containing lyric data is played.

Style File Format Guitar Edition

“SFF (Style File Format)” is an original Style file format by Yamaha which uses a unique conver-

sion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord

types. “SFF GE (Guitar Edition)” is an enhanced format of SFF, which features improved note

transposition for guitar tracks.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone genera-

tion format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. How-

ever, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due

to the reduced set of control parameters and effects.

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Special Features

Amazingly Authentic Piano Sound and “Piano Room” Performance Controls

Page 27, 25

The DGX-660 features an authentically expressive piano Voice (“Natural! Grand Piano”; Voice 001) meticulously

sampled from a concert grand piano—perfect for playing not only classical compositions but also piano pieces in

any style. No matter what instrument settings have been made, you can instantly call up the Piano Voice by simply

pressing and holding the [PIANO ROOM] button.

In addition, the instrument has a special Piano Room feature that provides even greater piano performance enjoy-

ment with highly intuitive control. Piano Room lets you select the desired piano type as well as different room

ambiences, giving you a complete, realistic piano experience—as if you were playing a real piano.

Graded Hammer Standard Keyboard

Thanks to our experience as the world’s leading manufacturer of acoustic pianos, we’ve developed a keyboard

with action that’s virtually indistinguishable from the real thing. Just as on a traditional acoustic piano, the keys of

the lower notes have a heavier touch, while the higher ones are more responsive to lighter playing. The keyboard’s

sensitivity can even be adjusted to match your playing style. This Graded Hammer technology gives the DGX-660

remarkably authentic touch in a lightweight instrument.

Amazingly Realistic and Dynamic Sounds Page 27

Yamaha’s authentic Voices (especially the highly acclaimed Live!, Sweet! and Cool! Voices) deliver incredibly

natural and dynamic sound—with all the nuances of the original instrument, from delicate to powerful.

Play Along with Styles Page 32

The DGX-660 also has complete and fully automatic accompaniment features with the Styles. These Styles pro-

vide the equivalent of a full backing band covering wide variety of genres—from waltz and swing to 8-beat and

euro-trance, plus much more. Select a Style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new

Styles to expand your musical horizons. And if it’s difficult to select the right Style from the huge variety avail-

able, use the Style Recommender function, which calls up a list of suggested Styles, based on a sample rhythm

you play. Also, this instrument features a Smart Chord function, allowing you to simply press single keys, and yet

play various chord progressions that authentically match the music genre and key you specify—giving you even

greater enjoyment from the Styles!

Easy Performance with Music Notation Display Page 41

When you play back a Song, the corresponding score is shown on the display. This is a great way to learn how to

read music. If the Song contains lyric and chord data, the lyrics and chords also appear in the score.

Connect a Microphone and Sing Along with Your Own Performance Page 69

Simply connect a microphone to the DGX-660, sing along with your keyboard performance or with Song play-

back—and hear everything mixed perfectly together from the instrument’s speakers. Three convenient preset set-

tings are provided for different vocal performance preferences and situations, and you can even make and save

your own original microphone settings.

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Keyboard Stand Assembly

The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly

instructions and select the parts as needed.

Read these cautions carefully before you assemble or use the keyboard stand.

These cautions are to promote safe use of the stand and to prevent injury and damage from occurring to you and others. By fol-

lowing these cautions carefully, your keyboard stand will provide you with safe and prolonged use.

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the

sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Use the stand after assembly is complete. An uncompleted stand may overturn or the keyboard may drop.

• Always place the stand on a flat, stable surface. Placing the stand on uneven surfaces may cause it to become unstable or over-

turn, the keyboard to drop, or injury.

• Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed purpose. Placing other objects on the stand may result in the object

dropping or the stand overturning.

• Do not apply excessive force to the keyboard as it may cause the stand to overturn or the keyboard to drop.

• Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws have been tight and firm before use. If not, the stand may overturn, the

keyboard may drop, or may result in injury to the user.

• To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

Have a phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready.

CAUTION

q Joint connectors

(4 pcs.)

r 6 x 70 mm roundhead

screws (4 pcs.)

t 6 x 30 mm roundhead

screws (4 pcs.)

y 5 x 16 mm roundhead

screws (4 pcs.)

Assembly Parts

Back board

Side

boards

Stand

bases

w Metal brackets e 3 x 8 mm roundhead

screws (12 pcs.)

A (1 pc.) B (1 pc.) C (2 pcs.)

Setting Up

Keyboard Stand Assembly

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Attach the metal brackets.

Attach the metal brackets w to the top of the side

boards, using the screws

e as shown.

Attach the stand bases.

Insert the joint connectors q into the side boards

as shown. The joint connectors have been installed

properly if you can see the screw head on the con-

nector.

Attach the “L” (Left) and “R” (Right) stand bases

to the bottom of the side boards, using the screws

r. “L” (Left) and “R” (Right) are marked on the

upper surfaces of the stand bases. If you have trou-

ble fastening the screws, use a screwdriver to

rotate the joint connectors so that the connector

holes are aligned with the screw holes on the stand

bases.

e 3 x 8 mm

roundhead

screws

w Metal bracket

(C)

w Metal bracket

(A)

w Metal bracket

(B)

w Metal bracket

(C)

e 3 x 8 mm

roundhead

screws

q Joint

connectors

r 6 x 70 mm

roundhead screws

“L”

“R”

• If you put the connectors in wrong direction and want to

take them out, tap around the holes on the boards.

NOTE

Keyboard Stand Assembly

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Attach the back board.

Attach the back board, using the screws t. Check

the back-to-front orientation for the side boards.

Make sure the non-colored surface is facing down.

Put the keyboard on the stand.

Check the back-to-front orientation for stand, and

carefully place the keyboard on the side boards.

Slowly move the keyboard so that the holes on the

bottom of the keyboard are properly aligned with

the holes on the angle brackets.

t 6 x 30 mm roundhead screws

At least

10 cm

At least

10 cm

Be sure to place your hands at

least 10 cm from either end of the

keyboard when positioning it.

• Be careful not to drop the back board or touch the

sharp metal fittings.

• If you have purchased a pedal unit (sold separately),

attach the pedal unit before proceeding to the next step.

Refer to the instructions provided with your pedal unit.

• For information on the pedal functions, refer to page 22.

• Be careful not to drop the keyboard or to get your fin-

gers caught between the keyboard and the stand

parts.

• Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than

the position shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

NOTE

CAUTION

Keyboard Stand Assembly

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Install the keyboard to the stand.

Fix the keyboard to the angle brackets, using the

screws

Post-assembly checklist

Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the following

points:

• Are there any parts left over?

 If so, read the assembly instructions again and cor-

rect any errors you might have made.

• Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fix-

tures?

 If not, move the instrument to an appropriate loca-

tion.

• Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you

play it or move it?

 If so, properly tighten all screws.

• Also, if the keyboard makes a creaking noise or seems

unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to the assem-

bly instructions and diagrams and retighten all screws.

y 5 x 16 mm

roundhead

screws

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Panel Controls and Terminals

Front Panel

q [ ] (Standby/On) switch.....................page 18

w [MASTER VOLUME] control ................ page 19

e [DEMO/BGM] button .................... pages 38, 66

r [SCORE] button....................................page 41

t [LYRICS] button....................................page 41

y [REC] button........................... pages 44, 46, 49

u LESSON START

[WAITING] button..............................page 43

[YOUR TEMPO] button .....................page 43

[MINUS ONE] button.........................page 43

i [SMART CHORD] button......................page 35

o [MIC SETTING] button .........................page 69

!0 Song Track

[1]–[5], [A] buttons............................page 40

Lesson

[R] and [L] buttons ...........................page 42

!1 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..........page 29

!2 [TEMPO/TAP] button.................... pages 63, 67

!3 SONG/AUDIO

[REPEAT&LEARN] button................page 43

[A-B REPEAT] button........................page 40

[REW] button.....................................page 40

[FF] button.........................................page 40

[PAUSE] button .................................page 40

[START/STOP] button .......................page 39

!4 STYLE

[ACMP ON/OFF] button.................... page 32

[INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button .............page 61

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ................page 61

[SYNC STOP] button ........................page 62

[SYNC START] button....................... page 33

[START/STOP] button....................... page 33

!5 REGIST MEMORY

[BANK], [1]–[4] buttons.................... page 50

!6 CATEGORY [

] and [

] buttons .......page 24

!7 [EXIT] button ........................................ page 23

!8 [EXECUTE] button ...............................page 82

!9 DATA ENTRY

Dial, Number buttons [0]–[9],

[+] and [-] buttons............................. page 24

@0 [FILE CONTROL] button......................page 82

@1 [FUNCTION] button.............................. page 72

@2 [PIANO ROOM] button.........................page 25

@3 [SONG/AUDIO] button .........................page 39

@4 [STYLE] button..................................... page 32

@5 [VOICE] button ..................................... page 27

@6 [MUSIC DATABASE] button................. page 33

@7 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button ....................... page 28

@8 [DUAL ON/OFF] button........................ page 28

@9 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ...............page 31

#0 [PITCH BEND] wheel ........................... page 56

#1 USB TO DEVICE terminal ...... pages 77, 80, 81

ert

!1 !2

Front Panel

Song category list Style category list

Panel Controls and Terminals

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Rear Panel

#2 CONTRAST knob .................................page 23

#3 USB TO HOST terminal.......... pages 74, 76, 77

#4 SUSTAIN jack .......................................page 21

#5 PEDAL UNIT jack .................................page 22

#6 PHONES/OUTPUT jack........................page 20

#7 AUX IN jack........................................... page 76

#8 MIC VOLUME knob ..............................page 69

#9 MIC INPUT jack .................................... page 69

$0 DC IN jack............................................. page 18

!7 !8

@2 @3

@4 @5

@7 @8 @9

A-1C0C1C2C3C4C5C6C7

#8 #9#6 #7 $0#5#4#3#2

Rear Panel

Voice category list Music Database category listDisplay (page 23)

“Press & Hold” symbol

By holding down one of the buttons having this sym-

bol, you can call up an alternate function, other than

the one called up when simply pressing.

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Power Requirements

Connect the AC power adaptor to the DC

IN jack.

Plug the AC power adaptor into an AC

outlet.

For the Power Adaptor with a Removable Plug

Do not remove the plug from the power adaptor. If the

plug is removed accidentally, slide the plug into place

without touching the metallic parts, and then push the

plug in completely until it clicks.

Turning the Power On/Off

Turn down the MASTER VOLUME control to “MIN”

then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the

power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the MAS-

TER VOLUME control. To turn off the power, press

the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a second.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 91) only. Using the wrong

adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or over-

heating.

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instru-

ment, or during electrical storms, to avoid the possibility of

physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instru-

ment or other property.

WARNING

CAUTION

AC outlet

AC power

adaptor

• Make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor.

Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire.

• Never touch the metallic section when attaching the

plug. To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage,

also be careful that there is no dust between the AC

adaptor and plug.

Plug

Slide the plug

as indicated

* The shape of the plug differs depending on locale.

WARNING

• When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a

small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the

instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a

long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from

the wall AC outlet.

CAUTION

Setting Up

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Setting the Volume

To adjust the volume level of the entire keyboard

sound, use the MASTER VOLUME control located at

the left of the panel. Play the keyboard to actually pro-

duce sound while you adjusting the volume to the

desired level.

Intelligent Acoustic Control (IAC)

IAC is a function which automatically adjusts and

controls the sound quality according to the overall

volume of the instrument. Even when the volume is

low, it permits both low sounds and high sounds to be

clearly heard. For details, refer to page 59.

Auto Power Off Function

To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this

instrument features an Auto Power Off function that

automatically turns the power off if the instrument is

not operated for a specified period of time. The

amount of time that will elapse before the power is

automatically turned off is set by default to 30 min-

utes.

To disable the Auto Power Off function:

Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch to turn on the power while holding down the

lowest key. Make sure to hold down lowest key until a

message appears at the top left of the display after

pressing the power switch.

To set the time that elapses before Auto Power Off

is executed:

Press the [FUNCTION] button, press the CATE-

GORY [r] or [f] button several times until “Auto

Power Off” appears, then select the desired value by

using the dial.

Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (min.)

Default value: 30 min.

• Do not use the instrument for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause

permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss

or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

CAUTION

• The recorded Song will be lost if the power is automatically

turned off without executing the save operation. Make sure

to save your recorded Song before the power turns off.

• Depending on the instrument status, the power may not

turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified

period of time. Always turn off the power manually when

the instrument is not in use.

• When the instrument is not operated for a specified period

of time while connected to an external device such as an

amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the

instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to

the instrument and the connected devices, in order to pro-

tect the devices from damage. If you do not want the

power to turn off automatically when a device is con-

nected, disable Auto Power Off.

NOTICE

Setting Up

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack)

Headphones

Any pair of stereo headphones with a standard stereo

phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient

monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off

when a plug is inserted into this jack. This setting can

be changed so that speaker sound is always on regard-

less whether a plug is inserted or not (page 58).

External Audio Equipment

The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an

external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUT-

PUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system,

mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device

to send the instrument’s output signal to that device.

Optimum setting

Output gain level for this jack is set to a value suitable

for connecting headphones, as the default setting. You

can switch this to the value suitable for connecting an

external audio device. For details on how to switch the

value, see page 58.

Standard

stereo

phone plug

Audio cable

Standard

stereo

phone plug

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic com-

ponents, turn off the power of all the components. Also,

before turning any components on or off, make sure to set

all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to

the components, electrical shock, or even permanent

hearing loss may occur.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long

period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since

this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any

hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

• When the instrument’s sound is output to an external

device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to

the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the

power off. If the instrument’s power is automatically turned

off via the Auto Power Off function (page 19), first turn off

the external device, then turn on the power to the instru-

ment then the external device again.

• Do not route the output from the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to

the AUX IN jack. If you make this connection, the signal

input at the AUX IN jack is output from the PHONES/OUT-

PUT jack. These connections could result in a feedback

loop that will make normal performance impossible, and

may even damage both pieces of equipment.

• Use audio cables and adaptor cables having no (zero) resis-

tance.

CAUTION

NOTICE

NOTE

Setting Up

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack)

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain

as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the sup-

plied footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sus-

tain on and off.

An FC3A foot pedal or FC4A or FC5 footswitch (sold

separately) can also be connected to this jack. The

FC3A lets you use the Half Pedal function (page 22).

Damper Resonance

This function simulates the sustain sound produced

with the damper pedal on a grand piano. If you want

to use this function, select a voice in the “Target Voice

List” below, then press the footswitch. This function

can be turned off via the FUNCTION display (page

74). For information on how to select a Voice, see

page 27.

Target Voice List

Assigning specific functions to the pedal

The function of the footswitch or the foot pedal con-

nected to SUSTAIN jack can be changed from its

default setting (Sustain).

Press the [FUNCTION] button, press the CATE-

GORY [r] or [f] button repeatedly until “Assign-

able Pedal” appears, then select the desired setting by

using the dial.

• Make sure that power is off when connecting or disconnect-

ing a footswitch or a foot pedal.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing

this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-

ing in reversed footswitch operation.

• The sustain function does not affect the Split Voice (page 28).

Voice No. Voice Name

001 Natural! Grand Piano

003 Live! Pop Grand Piano

004 Live! Warm Grand Piano

008 Honky Tonk Piano

167 Natural Grand Piano (XG)

169 Live Pop Grand Piano (XG)

170 Live Warm Grand Piano (XG)

173 Honky Tonk Piano (XG)

• This effect is applied only to a Voice in the “Target Voice List”

selected as the Main Voice or used in Track 1 (page 68) of the

Song.

NOTE

SUSTAIN

Allows you to use a pedal to control sustain.

When you press and hold the pedal, all notes

played on the keyboard have a longer sustain.

PORTAMENTO

The portamento effect (a smooth slide

between notes) can be produced while the

pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced

when notes are played legato style (i.e., a

note is played while the preceding note is still

held). The portamento time can also be

adjusted in the Function “Portamento Time”

(page 74).

MIC ON/OFF

Turns the microphone sound on or off (page

71).

START/STOP

Same as the [START/STOP] button (pages

33, 39).

TAP T E M PO

When Style and Song are stopped, tapping

the pedal at the desired tempo—four times for

time signatures in 4 (4/4, etc.), and three

times for time signatures in 3 (3/4, etc.) starts

playback of the rhythm part of the Style or the

Song at the tempo you tapped the pedal. Dur-

ing playback of a Style or Song, you can

change the tempo by tapping the pedal twice

at the desired tempo.

• This function does not affect the Voice 001

“Natural! Grand Piano” and 167 “Natural

Grand Piano (XG)”, which would not

sound appropriately with this function.

• This affects only Main/Dual Voices and the

Harmony sound (pages 27, 28 and 31),

and has no effect on the Split Voices

(page 28).

NOTE

Setting Up

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Connecting a Pedal Unit (PEDAL UNIT jack)

This jack is for connecting an LP-7A/LP-7AWH pedal

unit (sold separately). When connecting the pedal

unit, make sure to also assemble the unit on the sup-

plied keyboard stand.

• Make sure that power is off when connecting or disconnect-

ing the pedal unit.

• This affects only Main/Dual Voices and Harmony sound

(pages 27, 28 and 31).

• The functions of the pedals of the pedal unit cannot be

changed.

Half Pedal function

(for FC3A and LP-7A/LP-7AWH)

This function allows you to vary the sustain length

depending on how far the pedal is pressed. The farther

you press the pedal, the more the sound sustains. For

example, if you press the damper pedal and the notes

you play sound a bit murky and loud with too much sus-

tain, you can partially release the pedal to lessen the

sustain (murkiness).

NOTE

Keyboard

Stand

LP-7A/7AWH

(sold separately)

Pedal Unit functions

Damper Pedal (Right)

Pressing this pedal will sustain notes longer. Releasing this

pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. This

pedal lets you use the Damper Resonance (page 21) and Half

Pedal (see above) functions. When using both a footswitch

and pedal unit, the last effect applied takes priority.

Sostenuto Pedal (Center)

If you play a note or notes on the keyboard and press the sos-

tenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will sus-

tain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the damper pedal had

been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be

sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a note or notes, for

example, while other notes are played “staccato.”

Soft Pedal (Left)

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the

timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft

pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is

pressed.

If you press and hold the

damper pedal here, all the

notes shown will be sustained.

If you press and hold the

sostenuto pedal here, only

the notes held at this timing

will be sustained.

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

MAIN Display

When the power is turned on, the MAIN display automatically appears. This display

shows the basic settings of the instrument, including the current Voice, Style, Song,

Audio and other settings.

To Return to the MAIN Display

You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the [EXIT] button.

CONTRAST knob

Adjust the CONTRAST knob on the rear panel of the instrument for optimum display legibility.

Registration Memory Status

Shows the selected

bank number.

Shows the memory

numbers that contain

data. A border appears

around the selected

number.

Style Status

Appears when Auto

Accompaniment (ACMP)

is on.

Appears when the Syn-

chro Stop function is

engaged.

Shows section name

Song Track Status

Indicates the track status of the current Song (pages

40 and 46).

Contains no data.

Contains data and is

muted.

Highlighted when ready

for recording.

Specified as Song

recording target.

Contains data and can

be played back.

Tempo

Display Title

Time Signature

Measure

Number

A-B Repeat

Appears when A-B Repeat (page 40) play-

back is engaged.

Lesson part

Shows the current Lesson part (page 42).

Voice

Indicates the current Voices (Main, Dual

and Split) (pages 27, 28).

Song or Audio

Indicates the current Song or Audio file.

Style

Indicates the cur-

rent Style (page

32).

Smart Chord setting (page 35)

M.D.B.

Indicates the current M.D.B. (page 33).

Transpose

Chord indication

Appears when the corresponding function

is turned on.

Page 54

Page 31

MIC

Appears when MIC is

set to ON (page 69).

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Basic Controls

Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic

controls below that are used to select items and change values.

 Dial

Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value, or

counterclockwise to decrease the value.

 Number buttons

Use the Number buttons to directly enter a number or

parameter value.

For numbers that start with one or two zeroes (such as

“003”), the first zeroes can be omitted. However, com-

pletely entering [0][0][3] will display “003”

quicker than pressing only [3].

Example: Selecting Voice 003

 [-] and [+] buttons

Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1,

or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by

1. Press and hold either button to continuously

increase or decrease the value in the corresponding

direction. To restore the value to the default setting,

press both buttons simultaneously.

 CATEGORY buttons

Use these buttons to jump to the first Voice, Style, or

Song in the next or previous Category, and call up the

next or previous Function sequentially.

Example: VOICE SELECT (MAIN) display

IncreaseDecrease

Press number

buttons [0], [0],

[3].

Press briefly

to increase.

Press briefly

to decrease.

In most procedures described throughout this owner’s

manual the dial is recommended for selection simply

because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection

method. Please note however, that most items or values

that can be selected using the dial can also be selected

using the [+] and [-] buttons.

Previous category Next category

Current category

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Enjoying Piano Performance (Piano Room)

The Piano Room function is for those who want to simply, conveniently, and fully enjoy

playing the instrument as a piano. No matter what settings you’ve made from the panel,

you can instantly call up the optimum settings for piano performance with a single but-

ton press. You can also change the piano settings as you desire, or record your perfor-

mance in the Piano Room as an audio file.

Press the [PIANO ROOM] button to call

up the Piano Room display.

This operation calls up the panel settings for piano

performance. All other functions except for the

relevant buttons ([BANK], REGIST MEMORY

[1]–[4], CATEGORY [r]/[f], [EXIT], [EXE-

CUTE], [+] (YES), [-] (NO), [METRONOME

ON/OFF], [TEMPO/TAP] buttons), the dial, the

pedal, the PITCH BEND wheel and master vol-

ume setting are disabled.

Use the [BANK] and REGIST MEMORY

[1]–[4] buttons to set the desired piano

settings.

To call up the DETAIL display, press the REGIST

MEMORY [4] button.

You can change the display by pressing the REG-

IST MEMORY [4] button repeatedly. (MAIN 

DETAIL  RECORD  MAIN)

MAIN display

Detail setting display

* The settings marked with * (asterisk) will be maintained even if

you exit from this display or turn off the power. Pressing the

[PIANO ROOM] button next time will call up the previously

entered Piano settings.

Play the keyboard.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Piano

Room display.

Playing a Piano Performance in

the Piano Room

• You can change the settings also by using the dial, CATE-

GORY [r]/[f], [+] (YES)/[-] (NO) buttons.

NOTE

Button Function Description

[1]

ENVIRONMENT*

For selecting the environment

(Reverb Type).

• CONCERT (Concert Hall)

• RECITAL (Recital Hall)

•STAGE

•ROOM

•OFF

[2] PIANO*

For selecting the desired Piano

type.

• GRAND (Grand Piano)

• POP (Pop Grand)

• WARM (Warm Grand)

• H. TONK (Honky Tonk)

[3]

LID POS.*

(Lid Position)

Determines how much the Lid is

opened. This cannot be set when

“Honky Tonk” is selected.

[4] DETAIL

For calling up the detailed setting

display.

Button Function Description

[BANK] TOUCH*

For selecting the Touch Response

sensitivity (page 57).

•SOFT

•MEDIUM

•HARD

[1] TUNE*

Determines the pitch of this instru-

ment in 1Hz steps.

Setting range: 416Hz–466Hz

[2]

D. RESO.*

(Damper Reso-

nance)

Determines whether Damper Reso-

nance is applied (ON) or not (OFF).

[3] RESET

Restores all settings of Piano Room

to the default. After a message

appears, press the [+] (YES) button

to restore all settings.

[4] RECORD

For calling up the recording display

(page 26).

• You can turn the Metronome on or off by pressing the

[METRONOME ON/OFF] button. For information on set-

ting the Metronome tempo and time signature, refer to

page 29.

NOTE

Basic Guide

Enjoying Piano Performance (Piano Room)

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

You can record your performance in the Piano Room

to a USB flash drive as an audio file.

Connect the USB flash drive to the USB

TO DEVICE terminal.

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read

“Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE

terminal” on page 80.

Press the [PIANO ROOM] button to call

up the Piano Room display.

Make settings as desired, such as Piano type, envi-

ronment, lid position and so on.

Press the REGIST MEMORY [4] button

once or twice to call up the “RECORD”

display.

Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] button to

start recording, then play the keyboard.

After you finish the performance, press

the REGIST MEMORY [1] button to stop

recording.

The Audio file will automatically be saved as

“UserAudioxxx” (xxx is 001–100) to the USB

flash drive. The file name is shown on the display.

To hear the recorded performance,

press the REGIST MEMORY [2] button.

Press the REGIST MEMORY [2] button again to

stop the playback.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Piano

Room display.

Playing back audio files recorded in the

Piano Room

In the Piano Room, you can play back only the latest

recorded audio file; other audio files recorded in the

Piano Room can only be played back after exiting

from the Piano Room. For information on playing

back the Audio files, refer to “Playing Back a Song or

Audio File” on page 39.

Recording your Performance

as Audio in the Piano Room

• Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or

turn the power off during recording. Doing so may cor-

rupt the USB flash drive data or the recording data.

• You can change the display by pressing the REGIST

MEMORY [4] button repeatedly. (MAIN



DETAIL



RECORD



MAIN)

NOTICE

NOTE

“RECORD” display

• A moving series of dots (…) appear in the display when

recording setup takes a long time. If this happens, wait to

play the keyboard until the dots are gone and the



STOP

button in the display flashes.

• After recording is stopped, a moving series of dots (…)

appear, indicating that saving is in progress.

NOTE

File name

NOTE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

In addition to the wonderfully realistic piano sounds, you can select and play other

musical instrument Voices, such as organ, guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums

and percussion, and even sound effects.

This procedure selects the Main Voice for playing on

the keyboard.

Press the [VOICE] button to call up the

Main Voice selection display.

The current Voice number and name will be high-

lighted.

Use the dial to select the desired Voice.

The Voice List is provided on the front panel, or in

the separate Data List.

Play the keyboard.

Preset Voice Types

When you want to reset various settings to default and

simply play a Piano sound, hold down the [PIANO

ROOM] button for longer than a second.

After a confirmation message appears on the display,

press the [+] (YES) button to call up the default piano

settings.

The Voice number is set to 001 “Natural! Grand

Piano” and all other settings are turned off automati-

cally, so only the Grand Piano Voice will play over the

entire keyboard.

Selecting a Main Voice

Current Voice number and name

Select 023 Cool! Organ

001–151

167–554

Instrument Voices

152–166

(Drum Kit)

Various drum and percussion sounds are

assigned to individual keys. Details on assign-

ing instruments to keys are provided in the

Drum Kit List of the separate Data List.

000

One Touch Setting (OTS)

The One Touch Setting feature automatically

selects the most suitable Voice for you when

you select a Style or Song. Simply select

Voice number “000” to activate this feature.

Playing the “Grand Piano”

(Piano Reset)

• Keep in mind that this Piano Reset function is different from

the Piano Room feature (page 25), even though the button is

the same.

• This function cannot be used while the Piano Room display

(pages 25, 26) is shown.

Hold for longer

than a second.

NOTE

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a differ-

ent Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.”

Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn

Dual on.

You can confirm whether the Dual function is on

in the MAIN display.

Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button again

to exit from Dual.

Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice

suitable for the current Main Voice, you can easily

select a different Dual Voice (page 60).

By dividing the keyboard into two separate areas, you

can play one Voice with your right hand and a differ-

ent Voice with your left.

Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn

on Split.

The keyboard is divided into the left hand and

right hand areas.

You can play a “Split Voice” on the left hand area

of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and

Dual Voice on the right hand area of the keyboard.

The highest key for the left hand area is referred to

as the “Split Point” which can be changed from

the default F#2 key. For details, refer to page 64.

You can confirm whether the Split function is on

in the MAIN display.

Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button again

to exit from Split.

You can easily select a different Split Voice (page

60).

Layering Two Voices—Dual

Voice

Two voices will sound

at the same time.

Dual Voice number and name appear when Dual is on.

Playing a Split Voice in the Left

Hand area

Split Voice

Split point

Main Voice and Dual Voice

Split Voice number and name appear when Split is on.

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

The instrument features a built-in metronome (a

device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for

practicing.

Press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] but-

ton to start the metronome.

Press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] but-

ton again to stop the metronome.

Adjusting the Metronome Tempo

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo

value, then use the dial to adjust the Tempo value.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit the TEMPO display.

Setting the Time Signature

Here, we’ll set a time signature of 3/4 as an example.

Hold down the [METRONOME ON/OFF]

button for longer than a second to call

up “Time Signature - Numerator.”

The time signature is shown on the display.

Rotate the dial to select “3.”

A bell will sound on the first beat of each measure

while the other beats will click.

Press the CATEGORY [f] button to call

up “Time Signature - Denominator.”

Using the Metronome

Current setting

Indicates the beat number in the measure.

Te mpo

• The setting of the time signature cannot be changed in the

Piano Room. Set it before calling up the Piano Room display.

• The metronome time signature will synchronize to a Style

or Song that is selected, so these parameters cannot be

changed while a Style or Song is playing.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second.

Numerator

(Number of beats

per measure)

Denominator

(The length of

one beat)

NOTE

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Rotate the dial to select “4.”

Confirm the setting by playing the Met-

ronome.

Setting the Metronome Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] but-

tons repeatedly to select “Metronome

Volume.”

Rotate the dial to set the Metronome Vol-

ume.

Setting the Bell sound

This allows you to select whether the click sound has

a bell accent, or plays only a click sound.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button

repeatedly to select “Bell.”

Rotate the dial to turn the bell sound on

or off.

Metronome volume

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

You can add harmony notes to the Main Voice.

Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to

turn Harmony on.

Although turning on the Harmony will select a

Harmony Type suitable for the current Main

Voice, you can select a different Harmony Type.

Hold down the [HARMONY ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second until “Har-

mony Type” appears on the display.

Rotate the dial to select the desired Har-

mony Type.

For details, refer to the separate Data List.

The effect and operation differs depending on the

Harmony Type. Refer to the section below.

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function

Settings (page 74).

Adding Harmony

Appears when Harmony is turned on.

Current Harmony Type

Hold for longer

than a second.

How to sound each Harmony Type

Harmony type 01 to 10, 13

Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the

auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the

Auto Accompaniment is on (page 32).

Harmony type 15 to 18 (Echo)

Play the keys.

Harmony type 19 to 22 (Tremolo)

Keep holding down the keys.

Harmony type 23 to 26 (Trill)

Hold down two keys.

Harmony type 11 (1+5) and 12 (Octave)

Play the keys.

Harmony type 14 (Multi Assign)

Both of the Main and Dual Voices should be turned on

when using the Multi Assign effect. The Main and

Dual Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in

the order you play them.

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Playing Styles

The instrument features a variety of accompaniment and rhythmic backing patterns

(called “Styles”) in a variety of different musical genres including pop, jazz, and many

others. Each Style features Auto Accompaniment, letting you produce automatic

accompaniment playback simply by playing “chords” with your left hand. This lets you

automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra — even if you’re playing by

yourself.

Press the [STYLE] button to call up the

STYLE selection display.

The current Style number and name is highlighted.

Use the dial to select the desired Style.

The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in

the separate Data List.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

on the Auto Accompaniment.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

MAIN display, then confirm whether the

Auto Accompaniment is on.

When the Auto Accompaniment is on, the key-

board area left to the Split Point (54: F#2)

becomes the “Auto Accompaniment range” and is

used only for specifying the chords.

• You can also play the Styles in the instrument’s flash

memory area transferred from a computer (refer to “Com-

puter-related Operations”—page 8) or loaded from a

USB flash drive (page 86), and Styles on a USB flash

drive connected to the instrument. These styles are num-

bered from 206 upward.

Playing only the Rhythm Part

Pressing the [START/STOP] button starts playback

of only the rhythm part. To stop playback, press the

[START/STOP] button again.

Keep in mind that some Styles, such as “PIANIST”

category Styles, have no rhythm part. These Styles

produce no sound even if you press the [START/

STOP] button. When you want to use any of these

Styles, always execute step 3 and later so that all

accompaniment parts will sound.

Currently selected Style

NOTE

• The Split Point can be specified from the FUNCTION dis-

play. For details, refer to page 64.

When this is on, the functions printed

below the buttons are available.

ACMP appears when Auto Accompa-

niment is on.

Auto Accompaniment range

Split point (F#2)

NOTE

Playing Styles

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

Synchro Start on.

Play a chord in the Auto Accompani-

ment range to start Style playback.

Play a melody with your right hand and chords

with your left.

Chord indication

Chords being played in the Auto Accompaniment

range will appear.

For information about chords, refer to “Chords”

(page 34) or use the Chord Dictionary function

(page 65).

You can adjust the volume of the Style playback.

For details, see page 63.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop

playback.

You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations to

Style playback by using “Sections.” For details,

refer to page 61.

If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired

Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music

Database, simply selecting your favorite music genre

calls up the ideal settings.

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button to

call up the Music Database selection

display.

Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start

are automatically turned on.

Use the dial to select the desired Music

Database.

This operation calls up the panel settings such as

Voice and Style that are registered to the selected

Music Database. The Music Database List is pro-

vided in the separate Data List.

Play the keyboard as described in Steps

6 to 7 in this page.

Flashes when Synchro

Start is on.

Auto Accompaniment range

Split point

Using the Music Database

Music Database name

Playing Styles

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

For users who are unfamiliar with chords, this chart shows the notes of common chords. Since there are

many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available

chord books for further details.

 indicates the root note.

• A wide variety of chord types can be recognized as well as the above chord types.

• Depending on the chord type, inversions can be used as well as in “root” position.

• Some chord types may not be recognized if some notes are omitted.

Chords

Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh

Easy Chords

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers.

For a root of “C”

To play a major chord

Press the root note () of

the chord.

To play a minor chord

Press the root note together

with the nearest black key to

the left of it.

To play a seventh chord

Press the root note together

with the nearest white key to

the left of it.

To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together with

the nearest white and black keys to

the left of it (three keys altogether).

Changing the Chord Fingering type

There are three different Chord Fingering Types. For details, refer to page 64.

Playing Styles

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

If you want to fully enjoy playing in various Styles but don’t know how to play the appropriate chords, Smart

Chord is very useful. This function lets you control Styles with just a single finger as long as you know the key of

your playing music, even if you don’t know any chord fingering such as major, minor, diminished and so on.

Appropriate chords suited for the music genre will sound whenever you press a single note, as if you were playing

the “right” chords.

Select the Style which you want to play

with, as described in steps 1–2 on page

32.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

MAIN display.

Press the [SMART CHORD] button to

turn on the Smart Chord function.

Hold down the [SMART CHORD] button

until the SMART CHORD setting display

appears.

On the KEY SIGNATURE page, use the

dial to select the Key Signature.

Make sure to select the Key Signature which is

same as that on your music score, or your desired

key for playing. Check the Key Signature indica-

tion at the right bottom corner of the display.

Using the Smart Chord feature

Key Signature (Key in F major) Chord Types

FF#dim Gm C7 FC7

• Smart Chord can be turned on after pressing the [STYLE]

button.

Indicates the current Smart Chord

settings, KEY and TYPE when the

Smart Chord is on.

NOTE

Hold for longer

than a second.

Since the number of flats or sharps is shown to the

right of Key Signature in the display, you can also

find the desired Key Signature by counting the

number of flats or sharps.

Indicates the selected Key Signature.

Set this to the same as your music

score.

Playing Styles

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

TYPE Page:

This page provides five Types of music genres

which determine the specific chord assignment for

each scale note in the Auto Accompaniment

range. Although selecting a Style in step 1 will

automatically set the optimum Type, you can

select a different Type here for more appropriate

results, if necessary. To do so, from the SMART

CHORD display press the CATEGORY [f] but-

ton to select the TYPE page then use the dial to

select a Type.

The actual chord assignments are provided in the

Smart Chord Chart in the separate Data List.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

Synchro Start on.

According to the music score or the

chord progression of your performance,

play only the root key with the left hand.

Pressing a key will start playback of the Style. You

can try the chord progression F - F# - G - C - F - C

in order referring to the score on page 35.

Press the [SMART CHORD] button to

turn off the Smart Chord function.

• Each music type assumes only typical or conventional

chord progression for the Style.

• The root of a chord shown at the bottom left of the display

during Song recording may be different when the

recorded Song is played back.

Indicates the chord you play

NOTE

A sample score for the Smart Chord function is

provided in the separate Data List.

Auto Accompaniment range

Split point

œ œ

FC7

.˙

.œ

œ œ

.˙

dim7

C7/G C7

dim7

Dm C

dim7

Gm7 C7



Keyboard Voice

Style

Key Signature

Type

No.001 Natural! Grand Piano

No.184 Learning 4-4

F Major (

* 1)

Standard

Playing Styles

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

This convenient function “recommends” optimum

Styles for your performance, based on the rhythm you

play for one or two measures.

Hold down the [STYLE] button for longer

than a second to call up the STYLE REC-

OMMENDER display.

The keyboard is divided by the B0 key into two

sections (Drum and Piano) as shown below.

The Drum instruments (Kick, Snare and Hi-Hat)

are assigned to the left-side section while the

Piano sound is assigned to the right.

Search for the desired Style.

2-1 Press the [START/STOP] button to start

the metronome.

A “WAITING” indication appears in the dis-

play. As necessary, use the [+]/[-] buttons to

select the beat, and use the [TEMPO/TAP]

button to adjust the tempo (page 63).

2-2 While “WAITING” is shown, play the

rhythm you have in mind on the Drum or

Piano section for one or two measures

along with the metronome.

Below are two possible examples.

The timing at which you play the keys is ana-

lyzed over several seconds, then playback of

the most recommended Style starts. In addi-

tion, the candidates of the other recom-

mended Styles are listed in the display.

Listen to the highest recommended

Style, while playing chords in the PIANO

section (as shown in step 1).

You can try out other Styles listed on the display

by using the dial. If you cannot find the desired

Style in the list, press the [STYLE] button, then

return to step 2-2.

When you’ve found a Style you’re satis-

fied with, press the [EXIT] button to exit

from the Style Recommender display.

Play the keyboard along with the Style

you just found.

Calling up Optimum Styles for

Your Performance

(Style Recommender)

Example 1: Play the following rhythm in

the Piano section of the keyboard.

Bossa Nova Styles or those of a similar feel

may be listed on the display.

Hold for longer

than a second.

Example 2: Play the following rhythm in

the special Drum section of the key-

board.

8-beat Styles or those of a similar feel may be

listed on the display.

• Only the note-on timing is analyzed. Tempo, pitches and

note length are ignored.

• The recommended Style plays back according to the last

chord played in the PIANO section. The PIANO section

detects chords using the Fingering Chord type “FullKey-

board” (page 64).

Snare

Kick

NOTE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Playing Songs and Audio Files

There are two kinds of data that can be recorded and played back on this instrument:

Songs and Audio files. Not only can you play back a Song or Audio file and listen to it,

but you can also play the keyboard along with Song or Audio file playback.

• Songs

The Songs are organized by category as listed below, allowing you to easily select from the desired category. The

numbers 001–100 are Preset Songs, and a complete list is provided in the separate Data List. The numbers 101–

105 are Songs you’ve recorded on this instrument, and numbers from 106 upward are MIDI files in SMF (Stan-

dard MIDI File) format in this instrument’s flash memory and a USB flash drive connected to this instrument.

• Audio files

Commercially available Audio files in WAV format (file extension: .wav with 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolu-

tion, stereo) and your own recorded Audio files on a USB flash drive can be played back (page 49).

Availability of functions differs between Songs and Audio files. In this manual, the following icons indicate

whether or not the explanation applies to Songs or Audio files individually.

Example: … Indicates explanation applies only to Songs.

This is a special demo for sound demonstrations and

features. Press the [DEMO/BGM] button to start play-

back of the Overview Demo continuously, calling up

the various displays in sequence.

To stop playback, press the [DEMO/BGM] button or

[START/STOP] button.

Please note that any Song-related functions with

“ ” cannot be applied to Overview Demo.

• Score data for the Preset Songs (exceptions are the Over View Demo Song and Songs 1–11) are provided in the Songbook,

which is available as a free download from the website (page 8).

 Gives you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument.

 Demonstrates many useful Voices of this instrument.

 These are piano solo pieces.

 These are piano ensemble pieces.

 When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these

songs are ideal for that purpose.

 Includes famous classical music pieces.

 Includes traditional songs from around the world.

 Songs you’ve recorded on this instrument (page 44).

 Songs (MIDI files) in the instrument’s flash memory area transferred

from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 8) or

loaded from a USB flash drive (page 86), and Songs (MIDI files) on a

USB flash drive connected to the instrument.

NOTE

SONG

AUDIO

Listening to the Overview Demo

• With the default setting, only one Demo is played back and

repeated when the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed. This set-

ting can be changed so that all Preset Songs are played, or all

Songs and Audio files on a USB flash drive are played. Five

playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one

that suits your needs (page 66).

SONG

NOTE

Playing Songs and Audio Files

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Pre-

cautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal”

on page 80.

If you want to play back a Song or Audio

file on a USB flash drive, connect a USB

flash drive to the USB TO DEVICE termi-

nal.

Audio files must be on a USB flash drive.

Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button once or

twice to call up the SONG SELECT dis-

play for Song selecting, or AUDIO

SELECT display for Audio selecting.

The available Songs or Audio files are listed on

the display.

If a USB flash drive is connected, pressing the

[SONG/AUDIO] button repeatedly toggles

between two displays: SONG SELECT and

AUDIO SELECT. If a USB flash drive is not con-

nected, this operation calls up only SONG

SELECT display.

Use the dial to select the desired Song

or Audio file.

When selecting Songs, refer to the list on page 38.

Press the [START/STOP] button to start

playback.

To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button

again.

You can adjust the Song volume (page 67) and

Audio volume (page 67).

Adjusting the Tempo of a Song

Same procedure as with Style tempo. See page 63.

Playing Back a Song or Audio

File

• In order to play a file on a USB flash drive, the file must

be stored either in the USB flash drive’s root directory

or a first-level/ second-level folder in the root directory.

Files stored in third-level-folders created inside a sec-

ond-level folder cannot be selected and played by this

instrument.

SONG

AUDIO

Important

USB flash drive (Root)

File

Can be selected/

played

Cannot be selected/

played

• The tempo of audio playback cannot be changed.

AUDIO SELECT display

SONG SELECT display

When this is on, the functions printed

above the buttons are available.

NOTE

Playing Songs and Audio Files

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

This instrument lets you fast forward [FF], rewind

[REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the Song or

Audio file.

Pressing the [REW] or [FF] button once moves one

measure backward/forward for Songs, or one second

for Audio files. Holding one of them scrolls back-

ward/forward continuously.

Press the [PAUSE] button to pause playback, and

press again to start from that point.

You can specify a desired section of a Song and

repeatedly play back that section by setting the A

point (start point) and B point (end point).

Start playback of the Song (page 39).

When playback reaches to the point you

want to specify as the start point, press

the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A

point.

When playback reaches to the point you

want to specify as the end point, press

the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set

the B point.

The specified A-B section of the Song will now

play repeatedly.

To cancel repeat playback, press the [A-

B REPEAT] button.

To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

Each “track” of a Song plays a different part—mel-

ody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. Each of the

tracks can be muted so that you can play the muted

part yourself.

Pressing the desired Track button repeatedly will tog-

gle the on/off status.

Fast Forward, Rewind, and

Pause

A-B Repeat

SONG

AUDIO

When this is on, the functions printed

above the buttons are available.

SONG

AUDIO

• If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the Song,

press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback.

Turning Each Track On/Off

• Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for

turning on or off.

NOTE

SONG

AUDIO

Track will play back.

Track is muted.

Track contains no data.

NOTE

Playing Songs and Audio Files

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

You can view the music notation (score) of the

selected Song.

Select a Song (steps 1–3 on page 39).

Press the [SCORE] button to call up the

Score display.

Pressing this button each time alternates the dis-

played notation style between single-staff and

double-staff.

Both chords and lyrics will be shown in single-

staff score display of a Song that includes chords

and lyric data.

Press the [START/STOP] button to start

Song playback.

The marker moves to indicate the current position.

If the Song parts are muted at this point you will

be able to hear only the sound of your own perfor-

mance so that you can play the Song yourself

while reading the score. Refer to page 40 for more

information on Song muting.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

MAIN display.

When the selected Song contains lyric data, you can

view it on the instrument’s display during playback.

Select Song 38 (steps 1–3 on page 39),

which is the only internal Song that pro-

vides lyric display.

Press the [LYRICS] button to call up the

Lyrics display.

The title, lyricist, and composer of the Song will

appear on the display.

Press the [START/STOP] button.

The Song will play back while the lyrics and

chords are shown on the display. The lyrics will be

highlighted to show the current location in the

Song.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

MAIN display.

Displaying the Song Score

• When there are many lyrics, they may be displayed in two

rows a measure, and/or some lyrics or chords may be

abbreviated.

• Small notes that are hard to read may be easier to read

after you use the Quantize function (page 75).

• No chords or lyrics are shown on the double-staff display.

SONG

AUDIO

MarkerChord

Lyrics

NOTE

Displaying the Lyrics

• Commercially available Song files, including XF format

files (page 10), are compatible with the Lyrics display fea-

tures as long as they are standard MIDI file format files

containing lyric data. Lyrics display may not be possible

with some files.

SONG

AUDIO

NOTE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Using the Song Lesson Feature

You can use the selected Song for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Try

practicing with these three Song Lesson types.

Lesson 1—Waiting

In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on

the display. The Song pauses until you play the right

note.

Lesson 2—Your Tempo

In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on

the display with the correct timing. The Song play-

back tempo will change to match the speed at which

you are playing at.

Lesson 3—Minus One

Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The

Song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part

you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to

the Song.

Select the desired Song for your lesson

(page 39).

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

MAIN display.

Select the part you want to practice.

Press the [R/1] button for a right-hand lesson, [L/

2] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the

[R/1] and [L/2] buttons simultaneously for a both-

hands lesson. The currently selected part is shown

in the upper right corner of the display.

Three Types of Song Lesson Practicing with Song Lesson

• Audio files cannot be used with the Lesson features.

• The Song Lesson features can be applied also to User

Songs and Songs (SMF format 0 and 1) on a USB flash

drive or transferred/loaded to the instrument (pages 84

and 86).

NOTE

: Right-hand lesson

: Left-hand lesson

: Both-hands lesson

Using the Song Lesson Feature

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Press the desired LESSON START but-

ton, [WAITING], [YOUR TEMPO] or

[MINUS ONE] to start playback of the

Song Lesson.

Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The

score marker and keyboard marker in the display

will indicate the notes to play.

To stop Lesson playback, press the [START/

STOP] button. Even during playback, you can

change the Lesson number by pressing the

[WAITING], [YOUR TEMPO] or [MINUS ONE]

button.

When Lesson playback reaches the end,

check your evaluation Grade on the dis-

play.

Your performance will be evaluated in four levels:

OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. After the

evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will

start again from the beginning.

If you want to practice a specific section in which you

made a mistake or you have difficulty with use the

Repeat & Learn function.

Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button dur-

ing Lesson playback.

The Song location will move back four measures, a

one-measure count will play, then Song playback will

start again. Playback of the four measures will repeat

with a one-measure count-in.

To exit from this status, press this button again.

• The notes in the on-screen score may be shown an

octave higher or lower (or more) depending on the Voice

used in the Song.

• Since the display has restrictions, the on-screen score

may appear somewhat different from commercially avail-

able scores. When using the Lesson function, also make

sure to refer to the notes shown in the on-screen key-

board at the bottom of the display. You can adjust the

score appearance on the Lesson display by changing the

Quantize parameter in the Score category in the Function

List (page 75).

Shifting the on-screen keyboard left or right.

If the Over indicator appears, the hidden ( ) areas

of the keyboard can be brought into view by pressing

the [+] or [-] button. Notes that actually fall outside the

keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson.

 Marker

 Marker

Over indicator

NOTE

The displayed range (61 keys)

Actual keyboard range (88 keys)

• The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNC-

TION “Grade” item (page 75).

Making Practice Perfect—

Repeat & Learn

• You can change the amount of measures the Repeat & Learn

function jumps back by pressing a number button [1] to [9]

during repeat playback.

NOTE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Recording Your Performance

This instrument allows you to record your performance in the following two methods.

• Song recording (MIDI recording)

With this method, recorded performances are saved to the instrument as a User Song, in SMF (format 0) MIDI

file. If you want to re-record a specific section or edit parameters such as Voice, use this method. Also if you want

to record your performance to each track one by one, execute “Recording to a Specified Track” of the Song

recording method. Since a User Song can be converted to an Audio file after recording (page 85), you may want to

use Song recording (with individual track recording) to first create a complex arrangement you would not other-

wise be able to play live, then convert it to an Audio file. Up to approximately 30,000 notes can be recorded for

one User Song.

• Audio recording (page 49)

With this method, recorded performances are saved to a USB flash drive as an Audio file. Recording is done with-

out designating the recorded part. Since it is saved in stereo WAV format of normal CD quality resolution

(44.1kHz/16bit) by default, it can be transmitted to and played on portable music players by using a computer.

This instrument allows you to record up to 80 minutes per single recording.

You can record up to five of your performances and

save them as User Song 101 through 105. This opera-

tion is for recording a new Song from scratch. If you

want to re-record a specific track, execute “Recording

to a Specified Track” on page 46.

Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button once or

twice to call up the SONG SELECT dis-

play for Song recording.

If a USB flash drive is connected, pressing the

[SONG/AUDIO] button repeatedly toggles

between two displays: SONG SELECT and

AUDIO SELECT. If a USB flash drive is not con-

nected, this operation calls up only SONG

SELECT display.

You can select the desired User Song with the dial.

If you want to record with a Style, press

the [STYLE] button then the [ACMP ON/

OFF] button to turn ACMP on.

Once you have set the ACMP to ON, don’t call up

the SONG SELECT or AUDIO SELECT display

because doing so will set the ACMP to OFF.

Press the [REC] button to enable record-

ing.

If a User Song was not selected beforehand, this

operation selects the lowest-numbered unrecorded

User Song (from 101–105) as the Recording tar-

get.

To cancel recording, press the [REC] button or

[EXIT] button.

Song Recording

• Split Voice, Metronome, the AUX IN sound and MIC INPUT

sound cannot be recorded.

SONG

AUDIO

NOTE

• If all User Songs (Song numbers 101–105) contain

recorded data, Song 101 will automatically be

selected. In this case, you will record over and erase

any previous data of this Song.

Track 1 (and A) is automatically

selected for recording.

NOTICE

Recording Your Performance

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Play the keyboard to start recording.

You can also start recording by pressing the

[START/STOP] button.

The current measure will be shown on the display

during recording.

After you finish performance, press the

[START/STOP] button or [REC] button to

stop recording.

When recording is stopped, a message asking if

you want to save the Song will appear.

Press the [+] (YES) button to save the

Song.

The Song will be stored as a MIDI file to Song

number 101–105. To cancel saving, press the [-]

(NO) button at the prompt.

To hear the newly recorded perfor-

mance, press the [START/STOP] button.

• You can use the Metronome while recording although the met-

ronome sound will not be recorded. After pressing the [REC]

button, set the Time Signature and start Metronome before

going on to step 4.

• The recorded Song will be lost if you turn the power off

without executing the save operation.

NOTE

Current measure

NOTICE

• Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Now Writ-

ing…” message is shown in the display. Doing so can

damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data.

• If you press the [-] (NO) button once in response to the

confirmation message, you have the option of saving the

Song later until the power is turned off or another Song is

selected. To do this hold down the [REC] button until the

save confirmation message appears, then press the [+]

(YES) button.

Data that cannot be recorded to Songs

AUX IN sound, Microphone sound, Metronome

sound, Damper Resonance effect, Split Voice,

Damper Resonance ON/OFF, Master EQ Type,

Output Gain, I.A.Control, I.A.Control Depth,

MDB, Song Volume, Transpose, Tuning, Split

Point

Data that cannot be changed during the

Song recording

Style Number, ACMP ON/OFF, Smart Chord set-

ting, Style Volume, Chord Fingering, Touch

Response, Time Signature

NOTICE

NOTE

Recording Your Performance

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

With Song Recording, you can create a Song consist-

ing of six tracks (1–5 and A) by recording your per-

formance to each track one by one. In recording a

piano piece, for example, you can record the right-

hand part to Track 1 then record the left-hand part to

Track 2, allowing you create a complete piece which

may be difficult to play live with both hands together.

To record a performance with Style playback, for

example, record the Style playback to Track A, then

record melodies to Track 1 while listening to the

already recorded Style playback. In this way, you can

create an entire Song which would otherwise be diffi-

cult, or even impossible, to play live.

Tracks [1]–[5] For recording your keyboard perfor-

mances, such as a piano piece.

Track [A] For recording Style playback.

If you want to re-record an existing User

Song, select the desired User Song.

(Execute step 1 on page 44 then select

the User Song from 101–105 using the

dial.)

If you want to record from scratch, select the unre-

corded User Song.

To specify the target track, while holding

down the [REC] button, press one track

button from [1]–[5] or [A].

To cancel recording to a specified track, press that

track button again.

To record your keyboard performance, specify

from [1] to [5]. (To record the Dual Voice specify

from [1] to [3].)

To record the Style playback, specify [A]. (ACMP

is automatically turned on.)

The selected track will be highlighted in the dis-

play.

(When Track 1 is specified)

(When Track A is specified)

When Track A is specified, you can specify one

more track from [1]–[5] by repeating this step, and

vice versa.

To cancel recording, press the [REC] button or

[EXIT] button.

Recording to a Specified Track

• Split Voice, Metronome, AUX IN sound and MIC INPUT sound

cannot be recorded.

Before recording, make the necessary settings

such as Voice/Style selection.

SONG

AUDIO

Tra ck

Style

Tra ck

NOTE

• If you record to a track that contains previously

recorded data, the previous data will be overwritten

and lost.

• If Auto Accompaniment is on and Track [A] has not yet

been recorded, Track [A] will automatically be selected

for recording when one of Tracks ([1]–[5]) is selected. If

you only want to record to Track [1]–[5], be sure to turn

Track [A] off.

• If the User Song selected in step 1 already contains

recorded Style data, the same Style number is automati-

cally set. If you want to select another Style, press the

[STYLE] button then use the dial to select the desired

Style after specifying the [A] track.

• You can use the Metronome while recording although the

metronome sound will not be recorded. After pressing the

[REC] button, set the Time Signature and start Metro-

nome before going on to step 3.

Press and

hold

Track 1 will be

highlighted

Track A will be

highlighted

NOTICE

NOTE

Recording Your Performance

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Play the keyboard to start Recording.

After you finish the performance, press

the [START/STOP] button or [REC] but-

ton to stop recording.

When recording is stopped, a message asking if

you want to save the Song appears.

Press the [+] (YES) button to save the

Song.

The Song will be stored as a MIDI file to Song

number 101–105. To cancel saving, press the [-]

(NO) button at the prompt.

The recorded track numbers in the display will be

shown in a box border.

To hear the newly recorded perfor-

mance, press the [START/STOP] button.

Record your performance to another

track by repeating steps 2–6.

In step 2, select a track which has no recorded

data. Play the keyboard while listening to the

already recorded data.

You can record to each track [1]–[5] using differ-

ent Voices. Before specifying the target track,

press the [VOICE] button and select the desired

Voice, then press the [EXIT] button.

• The recorded performance will be lost if you turn the

power off without executing the Save operation.

• Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Now Writ-

ing…” message is shown in the display. Doing so can

damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data.

NOTICE

• When recording another track, you can turn already

recorded tracks on or off using the track buttons.

See page 45 for information on data that cannot be

recorded to the Songs or cannot be changed during

Song recording.

NOTE

Recording Your Performance

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

You can clear all tracks of a User Song.

Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button, and

then select the User Song (101 to 105) to

be cleared.

While holding down the track [A] button,

press the track [1] button for longer than

a second.

A confirmation message will appear on the dis-

play.

To cancel this operation, press the [-] (NO) button.

Press the [+] (YES) button to clear the

Song.

A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on

the display.

This lets you clear individual tracks from a User Song.

Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button, and

then select the desired User Song (101

to 105).

From [1] to [5] and [A], press the Track

button to be cleared for longer than a

second.

A confirmation message will appear on the dis-

play.

To cancel this operation, press the [-] (NO) button.

Press the [+] (YES) button to clear the

track.

A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on

the display.

Clearing a User Song

SONG

AUDIO

Press and

hold

Hold for longer

than a second.

Clearing a Specified Track from

a User Song

SONG

AUDIO

Hold for longer

than a second.

Recording Your Performance

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Before recording, make the necessary settings such as

Voice/Style selection and the AUX IN and MIC

INPUT connections (if you want to record with the

input sound via AUX IN and MIC INPUT jacks). All

the sound produced via this instrument other than

Metronome can be recorded.

Connect the USB flash drive to the USB

TO DEVICE terminal.

Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read

“Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE

terminal” on page 80.

Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button once or

twice to call up the AUDIO SELECT dis-

play for Audio recording.

If a User Audio file was not selected beforehand,

this operation selects a new Audio file as record-

ing target.

As necessary, select the Audio file for

recording target.

If multiple Audio files are in the USB flash drive

and the wrong file is selected by mistake, you can

select a different file by using the dial. If you want

to create a new Audio file, select “000 New

Audio.”

Press the [REC] button to be ready for

recording.

If you want to cancel recording, press the [REC]

button again or [EXIT] button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button to start

recording, then play the keyboard.

After you finish the performance, press

the [EXECUTE] button or [REC] button

to stop recording.

The Audio file will automatically be saved as

“UserAudioxxx” (xxx is 001–100) in a folder

labeled “USER FILES” which will automatically

be created on the USB flash drive.

To delete the User Audio files 001–100, perform

“USB Delete” described on page 87.

To hear the recorded performance,

press the [START/STOP] button.

Audio Recording

• Don’t use the file name “_DGX-660_TMP.wav” in the USB

flash drive because the file with the name will be overwrit-

ten and erased by newly recording Audio data.

• If you record to Audio file that contains previously

recorded data, the previous data will be overwritten

and lost.

SONG

AUDIO

NOTICE

New Audio file

NOTICE

• Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or

turn the power off during recording. Doing so may cor-

rupt the USB flash drive data or the recording data.

The elapsed recording time is shown

in the MAIN display while recording.

NOTICE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings

This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favor-

ite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 32 complete setups can be

saved (eight banks of four setups each).

Make the desired settings such as those

for Voice and Style.

Press and release the [BANK] button to

call up a Bank number on the display.

Use the dial to select a Bank number.

While holding down the [BANK] button,

press one of the REGIST MEMORY [1] to

[4] buttons to memorize the current

panel settings.

You can check the Registration Memory status in

the MAIN display; Memory numbers that contain

data light up, and a border appears around the

selected one.

Up to 32 presets (eight

banks of four each) can

be memorized.

Memory 1 Memory 2

8 Banks

Memory 3 Memory 4

Memorizing Panel Settings to

the Registration Memory

• Data cannot be saved to the Registration Memory during

Song playback.

Bank number

NOTE

• If you select a Registration Memory number that

already contains data, the previous data is deleted and

overwritten by the new data.

• Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings to

the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may be

damaged or lost.

Bank number

Press and

hold

Memory number

NOTICE

Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Press and release the [BANK] button to

call up a Bank number on the display.

Use the dial to select a Bank number.

Press one of the REGIST MEMORY [1] to

[4] buttons to call up the panel settings

you memorized.

You can check the Registration Memory status in

the MAIN display (page 23).

Recalling Panel Settings from

the Registration Memory

Bank number

Settings that are Saved to the Registration

Memory

Style settings*

Style number, Auto Accompaniment on/off, Split Point, Style

settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering,

Smart Chord on/off, Smart Chord Setting

Voice settings

Main Voice setting

(Voice number and all settings of the related

Functions)

Dual Voice settings

(Dual on/off, Voice number and all

settings of the related Functions)

Split Voice settings

(Split on/off, Voice number and all

settings of the related Functions)

Effect settings

Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain on/off, DSP

on/off, DSP Type

Harmony settings

Harmony on/off and all settings of the related Functions

Other settings

Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Assignable Pedal, Porta-

mento Time

* Style settings are not available for Registration Memory

when using the Song/Audio features.

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Basic Guide

Backup Parameters and Initialization

The following data will be maintained even if the

power is turned off and can be transferred then saved

to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single

Backup file. For instructions, refer to “Computer-

related Operations” (page 8).

In addition to the Backup data above, all the User

Songs and all the Song and Style files transferred

from a computer or loaded from a USB flash drive

will be maintained even if you turn off the power.

To initialize Backup data, execute “Clearing Backup

data.”

To initialize data (excluding Backup data) transferred

from a computer or loaded from a USB flash drive,

execute “Clearing files in flash memory area.”

This function erases the Backup data described above

and Song/Style data, then restores all the default fac-

tory settings. As required, execute one of the follow-

ing two procedures.

Clearing Backup data

This operation initializes the backup data.

While holding down the highest white key on the key-

board, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the

power on. Make sure to hold down the key until the

message appears at the top left of the display.

Clearing files in flash memory area

This operation deletes all User Songs and all the

Songs and Styles that have been transferred from a

computer or loaded from a USB flash drive. While

simultaneously holding the highest white key and the

three highest black keys, press the [ ] (Standby/On)

switch to turn the power on. Make sure to hold down

the keys until the message appears at the top left of the

display.

Backup Parameters

Backup Data

• Piano Room settings (Refer to page 25 for

details.)

• Registration Memory data (page 50)

• Microphone settings (Refer to page 71 for

details.)

• Function Settings (page 72):

Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style

Volume, Song Volume, Wireless LAN Vol-

ume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo

Group, Demo Play mode, Demo Cancel,

Panel Sustain, Master EQ type, Chord Fin-

gering, Auto Power Off setting, Damper

Resonance ON/OFF, Output Gain, I.A.

Control ON/OFF, I.A. Control Depth,

Audio Volume, AUX IN Level, Portamento

Time, Assignable Pedal

• Wireless LAN settings (page 77)

Initialization

• Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you

have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a

computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For

details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 8).

NOTICE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Handy Performance Features

Selecting a Reverb Type

The Reverb effect lets you play with a rich concert

hall type ambience. Although selecting a Style or

Song will call up the optimum Reverb type for the

entire sound, you can select a different Reverb type

manually.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] but-

tons to call up “Reverb Type.”

The current Reverb type is shown below.

Rotate the dial to select a Reverb type.

Play the keyboard to check the sound. For infor-

mation about the available Reverb types, refer to

the Effect Type List in the separate Data List.

Selecting a Chorus Type

The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar

to many of the same Voices being played in unison.

Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the

optimum Chorus type for the entire sound, you can

select a different Chorus type manually.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] but-

tons to call up “Chorus Type.”

The current Chorus type is shown.

Rotate the dial to select a Chorus type.

Play the keyboard to check the sound. For infor-

mation about the available Chorus types, refer to

the Effect Type List in the separate Data List.

• Some Songs and Styles use Reverb Types which cannot

be selected via panel operations. If such a Song or Style

is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display. In such a

case, you can select Reverb type 01 using the [+] or [-]

button.

Adjusting the Reverb Level

You can adjust the Reverb level applied to the

Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the

same operations above. Regarding the item in Step

2, refer to the Function List on page 73.

Current Reverb type

NOTE

• Some Songs and Styles use Chorus Types which cannot

be selected via panel operations. If such a Song or Style

is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display. In such a

case, you can select Chorus type 01 using the [+] or [-]

button.

Adjusting the Chorus Level

You can adjust the Chorus level applied to the

Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the

same operations above. Regarding the item in Step

2, refer to the Function List on page 73.

Current Chorus type

NOTE

Reference

Handy Performance Features

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Selecting a DSP Type

DSP is an abbreviation of Digital Signal Processing.

These range from reverb-like ambience effects to dis-

tortion and other dynamic processing tools that let you

enhance the sound, or completely transform it. The

DSP effect can be added to the Main and Dual Voices.

Although ON/OFF status and type selection for DSP

depends on a selected Main Voice, you can set these

parameters manually.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] but-

tons to call up “DSP.”

The current setting is displayed.

Use the dial to turn DSP on.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN

display in order to check the DSP on/off status.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] but-

tons to call up “DSP Type.”

The currently selected DSP type will be displayed.

Use the dial to select a DSP type.

For information about the available DSP types,

refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data

List.

• The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when

turning DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The

amount of change differs depending on the selected

Voice.

• The DSP type is an overall setting—only one type can be

selected. For this reason, when you play a newly loaded

Song or Style, for example, the currently playing Voices

may not sound as expected. This is normal, since the

Song or Style has its own DSP type which replaces any

selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phenom-

enon occurs when you use the [FF], [REW] buttons or A-

B Repeat function during Song playback.

NOTE

Adjusting the DSP Level

You can adjust the DSP level applied to the Main

and Dual Voices individually via the FUNCTION

display. Refer to “** DSP Level” in the Function

List (page 73).

Appears when DSP is on

Handy Performance Features

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Panel Sustain

This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use

it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all

times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain

function does not affect the Split Voice.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] but-

tons to call up “Sustain.”

The current setting is displayed.

Use the dial to turn panel sustain on or

off.

Pitch Controls—Transpose

The overall pitch of the instrument (except for the

Voices with name “*** Kit”) can be shifted up or

down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone incre-

ments.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] but-

tons to call up “Transpose.”

The current setting is displayed.

Use the dial to set the Transpose value

between -12 and +12.

• The sustain of some Voices may not be obviously or audi-

bly affected when the panel sustain function is turned on.

NOTE

Current Transpose value

Handy Performance Features

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Pitch Controls—Tuning

The overall tuning of the instrument (except for the

Voices with name “*** Kit”) can be shifted up or

down between 415.3 Hz and 466.2 Hz in approxi-

mately 0.2Hz or 0.3Hz increments. The default value

is 440.0 Hz.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons

to call up “Tuning.”

The current setting is displayed.

Use the dial to set the Tuning value.

Pitch Controls—the PITCH

BEND wheel

The PITCH BEND wheel can be used to add smooth

pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard.

Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward

to lower the pitch. You can change the amount of pitch

bend produced by the wheel. Refer to “Pitch Bend

Range” in the Function List (

page 73).

Current value

• The pitch may not be raised to the designated value depend-

ing on the selected Voice.

• The effects produced by using the PITCH BEND wheel may

not be applied to the Split Voice when the [ACMP ON/OFF] is

ON.

NOTE

Handy Performance Features

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Touch Response Sensitivity

The keyboard of this instrument is equipped with a

Touch Response feature that lets you dynamically and

expressively control the level of the Voices according

to your playing strength.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button

to select “Touch Response.”

The current Touch Response sensitivity is displayed.

Use the dial to select one of the Touch

Response sensitivity settings (1–4).

When “1 (Soft),” “2 (Medium)” or “3 (Hard)” is

selected, Touch Response is active. When “4”

(Fixed) is selected, all notes will be played at the

same volume no matter how strongly or softly you

play the keys.

Selecting an EQ Setting for the

Best Sound

Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are pro-

vided to give you the best possible sound. Master

Equalizer is EQ processing that is applied to the over-

all sound (except Audio) which is finally output from

the Effect block to the speakers or headphones.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] but-

ton several times until “Master EQ Type”

appears.

The current Master EQ type is displayed.

Use the dial to select the desired Master

EQ type.

1 (Soft)

With a soft touch, the instrument pro-

duces a loud sound. The volume level

of tones tends to be consistent.

2 (Medium) Standard touch response.

3 (Hard)

You must hit the key very hard to gen-

erate a loud volume. This allows for

versatile expression, from pianissimo

to fortissimo tones.

4 (Fixed)

No touch response. The volume level

will be the same regardless of how

hard you play the keys.

• The initial default Touch Response Sensitivity value is “2.”

Current Touch Response sensitivity

NOTE

1 (Normal) Flat EQ settings.

2 (Piano) Optimum for piano solo performance.

3 (Soft)

Lowers the high range for a softer

sound.

4 (Bright)

Lowers the mid range for a brighter

sound.

5 (Powerful) Features more powerful sound.

• “5 (Powerful)” produces a more punchy sound but may

produce distortion depending on the Voice and Style,

compared to the other Master EQ types.

Current Master EQ type

NOTE

Handy Performance Features

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Setting the Output Gain Level

Output gain level for the PHONES/OUTPUT jack can

be switched among three values: one suitable for a

headphone and the other two for a connected external

audio device.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] but-

ton several times until “Output Gain”

appears.

Use the dial to select the desired setting

(below).

Speaker On/Off Setting

You can set whether the sound of this instrument is

always output from its built-in speaker or not when a

plug is inserted to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] but-

ton several times until “Speaker Con-

trol” appears.

Use the dial to select the desired setting.

When “NORMAL” is selected the speakers are

automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into

the PHONES/OUTPUT jack. When “ALWAYS

ON” is selected the speaker sound is always on

regardless of whether a plug is inserted or not.

Headphones

Select this when using headphones.

The output gain level is set to an opti-

mum value headphones connection.

When “Headphones” is selected and

external audio equipment is con-

nected to the PHONES/OUTPUT

jack, distortion may be produced.

Line Out

Select this when using external audio

equipment.

The output gain level can be adjusted

by the [MASTER VOLUME] control of

the instrument.

Fixed

Select this when using external audio

equipment.

The output gain level is fixed at the

same level, regardless of the position

of instrument's [MASTER VOLUME]

control.

Current setting

Handy Performance Features

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Intelligent Acoustic Control (IAC)

IAC is a function which automatically adjusts and

controls the sound quality according to the overall

volume of the instrument. Even when the volume is

low, it permits both low sounds and high sounds to be

clearly heard. IAC is effective only from the sound

output of the instrument speakers. Although the

default settings of IAC is set to ON, you can turn the

function on or off. In addition, you can set the depth

of IAC.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] but-

ton several times until “I.A. Control”

appears.

Use the dial to turn IAC on or off.

Setting IAC Depth

You can adjust the depth of the IAC effect.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] but-

ton several times until “I.A. Control

Depth” appears.

Use the dial to set the desired value.

The setting range is from -3 to 3. The higher the

value, the deeper the effect.

Current setting

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Voice Settings

Selecting a Dual Voice

Hold down the [DUAL ON/OFF] button

for longer than a second to call up the

“VOICE SELECT (DUAL)” display.

Rotate the dial to select the desired Dual

Voice.

Selecting a Split Voice

Hold down the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button

for longer than a second to call up the

“VOICE SELECT (SPLIT)” display.

Rotate the dial to select the desired Split

Voice.

Voice Editing

For each of the Main, Dual and Split Voices, you can

edit the parameters such as volume, octave and depth

of the Reverb and Chorus, allowing you to create new,

custom sounds that best suit your musical needs.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons

to call up the desired item.

Main Voice parameters are indicated as “Main

***,” Dual Voice parameters as “Dual ***,” and

Split Voice parameters as “Split ***.” For infor-

mation about each parameter, refer to the Function

List on

page 73.

Rotate the dial to set the value.

Check the sound by playing the keyboard.

Repeat Steps 2–3 above to edit various

parameters.

If necessary, memorize the settings to

the Registration Memory (page 50).

The Voice-related settings are reset when a differ-

ent Voice is selected. If you want to store the cre-

ated sound for future recall, memorize the settings

to the Registration Memory.

Hold for longer

than a second.

Current Dual Voice

Hold for longer

than a second.

Current Split Voice

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

Style Variations—Sections

Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the per-

formance you are playing.

Press the [STYLE] button, then rotate

the dial to select a Style.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the

MAIN display.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn

ACMP on.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn

Synchro Start on.

Intro Main

Ending Fill-in

Intro

This is used for the beginning of the performance. When the Intro finishes, Style playback shifts to the

Main section. The length of the Intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Main

This is used for playing the main part of the performance. Playback of the Main section repeats indefi-

nitely until another Section’s button is pressed. There are two variations (A and B), and the Style playback

sound changes harmonically in response on the chords you play with your left hand.

Fill-in

This is automatically added before changing to Main A or B.

Ending

This is used for the ending of the performance. When the Ending finishes, Style playback stops automati-

cally. The length of the Ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style.

Appears when ACMP is

turned on.

Synchro Start

When Synchro Start is on, Style playback will

begin as soon as you play a chord in the Auto

Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Pressing

the [SYNC START] button alternately turns Syn-

chro Start on or off.

The indicator flashes when

Synchro Start is on.

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to

select Main A or Main B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the

Intro section.

Play a chord with your left hand to start

playback of the Intro.

For this example, play a C major chord (as shown

below). For information on how to enter chords,

see “Chords” on page 34.

After the Intro finishes, play the key-

board according to the progression of

the performance you are playing.

Play chords with your left hand while playing

melodies with your right hand, and press the

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The

Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B.

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

The Section switches to the Ending. When the

Ending is finished, Style playback stops automati-

cally. You can have the Ending gradually slow

down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/END-

ING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing

back.

Current Section

Split point

Auto Accompaniment range

Synchro Stop

When you press the [SYNC STOP] button to turn

on this function, the Style will only play while

pressing chords in the Auto Accompaniment range

of the keyboard. Releasing all the notes will stop

Style playback. This makes it easy to add rhythmic

breaks as you perform, simply by releasing your

hand from the Auto Accompaniment range of the

keyboard.

Pressing the [SYNC STOP] button alternately

turns Synchro Stop on or off.

The Style plays while

you are playing the

keys.

Style playback stops

instantly when you

release the keys.

Appears when the Synchro Stop

function is on.

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Changing the Tempo

A Style can be played at any tempo you desire—fast

or slow.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up

the Tempo display.

Rotate the dial to set a tempo.

Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to

instantly reset the value to the default tempo of the

current Style. You can change the tempo during

playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button

just twice at the required tempo.

Tap Start

You can start play back of the Style or Song by simply

tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required

tempo—four times for time signatures in 4 (4/4, etc.),

and three times for time signatures in 3 (3/4, etc.).

Adjusting the Volume of the Style

You can adjust the volume balance between Style

playback and keyboard performance.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] but-

tons to call up “Style Volume.”

Rotate the dial to set the volume.

Playing Chords Without Style

Playback (Stop Accompaniment)

If you press the [STYLE] button, press the [ACMP

ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on (the ACMP ON

icon appears), and play the chord in the left hand

range of the keyboard (with SYNC START off), the

chord sound will be heard without Style playback.

This is referred to as “Stop Accompaniment.” The

specified chord will be shown in the display, and

affects the Harmony function (page 31).

• The above operation applies also to Song playback

tempo.

Current Tempo value

NOTE

Current value

Style Volume

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Setting the Split Point

The point on the keyboard that separates the left-hand

range and the right-hand range of the keyboard is

called the “Split Point.”

When a Style is selected and ACMP is on, the notes

played to the left of the Split Point are used to specify

the chord for Style playback. When the Split function

is on, the notes played to the left of the Split Point are

used to play the Split Voice.

The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the

F#2 key), but you can change it to another key.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] but-

tons to call up “Split Point.”

Rotate the dial to set the Split Point

between 021 (A-1) and 108 (C7).

To restore the value to the default setting, press

[+]/[-] buttons simultaneously.

Setting the Chord Fingering

There are three different Fingering Types which let

you specify the chord type for Style playback or use

the entire keyboard range for chord specifying.

Press the [STYLE] button.

Holding down the [ACMP ON/OFF] but-

ton for longer than a second to call up

the “Chord Fingering” display.

Use the dial to select the desired setting.

• The Split Point set here is applied to both the Style and

Voice.

• During the Lesson playback, the Split Point cannot be

changed.

Split Point

Split point (54: F#2)

Split voice

Main voice

NOTE

1 (Multi Finger)

Recognizes the various chord types

which are listed on the separate Data

List, including “Easy Chords” (this

book, page 34).

2 (FullKeyboard)

Detects chords in the entire key

range. Chords are detected in a way

similar to 1 (Multi Finger), even if you

split the notes between your left and

right hands — for example, playing a

bass note with your left hand and a

chord with your right, or by playing a

chord with your left hand and a mel-

ody note with your right. In this mode,

Easy Chords cannot be detected.

3 (AI Fingered)

Less than three notes can be played

to indicate the chords (based on the

previously played chord, etc.).

Hold for longer

than a second.

Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

The Dictionary function is useful when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to

play it.

Press and hold the [MINUS ONE] button

for longer than a second to call up the

DICTIONARY display.

As an example, learn how to play a GM7

(G major seventh) chord.

2-1 Referring to the illustration, press the G key

in the “Chord Root” range so that “G” is

shown as the root note (no sound will be pro-

duced).

2-2 Referring to the illustration, press the M7

(major seventh) key in the “Chord Type”

range (no sound will be produced).

The notes you should play for the specified

chord (root note and chord type) are shown in

the display, both as notation and in the key-

board diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord, press

the [+]/[-] buttons.

Following the notation and keyboard

diagram in the display, try playing a

chord in the “Playing” range.

When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell

sound signals your success and the chord name in

the display will be highlighted.

To exit from this function, press the [EXIT] but-

ton.

Highest keyChord Root range Chord Type rangePlaying range

• About major chords: Simple major chords are usually

indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to

C major. However, when specifying major chords here,

make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root

note.

Chord name (root and type)Notation of chord

Individual notes of chord (keyboard)

NOTE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Song and Audio Settings

Background Music (BGM) Playback

With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO/BGM]

button will play back only Overview Demo Song

repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for

example, all internal Songs are played, or all Songs

and Audio files on a USB flash drive are played back,

letting you use the instrument as a background music

source. Five playback group settings are provided.

Simply select the one that suits your needs.

Hold down the [DEMO/BGM] button for

longer than a second to call up the

“Demo Group” display.

The current repeat playback target is shown.

Rotate the dial to select a repeat play-

back group from the table below.

Press the [DEMO/BGM] button to start

playback.

To stop playback, press the [DEMO/BGM] button

again.

Random Playback

The order of repeat playback via the [DEMO/BGM]

button can be changed between numerical and random

order.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] but-

tons several times to select “Demo Play

Mode.”

The current playback mode, “1 (Normal)” or “2

(Random),” is shown.

When the “Demo Group” is set to “1 (Demo),”

this parameter cannot be set.

Rotate the dial to select “2 (Random).”

To return to numerical order, select “1 (Normal).”

Press the [DEMO/BGM] button to start

playback.

To stop playback, press the [DEMO/BGM] button

again.

1 (Demo) Overview Demo Song

2 (Preset) All preset Songs

3 (User) All User Songs

4 (Download) All Songs transferred from a computer

5 (USB)

All Song files (MIDI files) and Audio files in

the connected USB flash drive.

Playback Order

Since the files in the root folder on a USB

flash drive will be sorted in alphabetical

order regardless of the file type, you can

alternately playback several Songs and

Audio files in order as in this example:

Song1.mid

Song1.wav

Song2.mid

Song2.wav

To do so, please make sure only the files to

be played back are in the root folder on a

USB flash drive and there are no other files

in the USB flash drive.

Hold for longer

than a second.

Demo Play Mode

Song and Audio Settings

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Tempo Setting of the Song

This operation is same as that of the Style. Refer to

page 63.

Tap Start

This operation is same as that of the Style. Refer to

page 63.

Song Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] but-

tons several times to call up “Song Vol-

ume.”

Rotate the dial to set the Song volume.

Audio Volume

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] but-

tons several times to call up “Audio Vol-

ume.”

Rotate the dial to set the Audio volume.

• Song volume can be adjusted while a Song is selected.

NOTE

Song Volume

• Audio volume can be adjusted while an Audio file is selected.

NOTE

Audio Volume

Song and Audio Settings

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Changing the Voice of the Song

You can change the Voice of Track 1 or 2 in the cur-

rent Preset Song temporarily to any other desired

Vo i c e .

Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button, select

the desired Preset Song, then start play-

back.

Hold down the [VOICE] button for longer

than a second to call up the “VOICE

SELECT (MELODY R)” display for

selecting a Voice.

Pressing the [VOICE] button alternates the display

between VOICE SELECT (MELODY R) and

VOICE SELECT (MELODY L), then select the

desired display. Melody R is the Track 1 Voice,

and Melody L is the Track 2 Voice.

Rotate the dial to select the desired

Voice.

As you select different Voices, the Melody Voice

of the Song changes while the Song remains the

same.

Specifying the Channel for the

Lesson Part

When using external Songs (only SMF format 0 and

1) in a USB flash drive (or transferred from a com-

puter) for lessons you can specify which channels are

to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand

parts. The default settings are channel 1 for the right-

hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part.

Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button and

select the Song (106–) for which you

want to set the guide track.

Press the [FUNCTION] button.

Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] but-

tons to select the “Right-Part” or “Left-

Part.”

Use the dial to select the channel you

want to play back as the specified right-

or left-hand part.

Hold for longer

than a second.

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance

By connecting a microphone to the MIC INPUT jack (standard 1/4” phone jack), you can

enjoy singing along with your keyboard performance or with Song playback. The

instrument outputs your vocals through the built-in speakers. You can enjoy the three

preset settings by just selecting one of them according to the particular circumstances

and your personal preferences, or you can create your own desired settings and save

them.

Connecting a Microphone

Before turning on the power of the

instrument, set the MIC VOLUME knob

to the minimum position.

Connect a microphone to the MIC INPUT

jack.

Turn on the power of the instrument.

Press the [MIC SETTING] button once or

twice to call up the MIC SETTING 1 dis-

play.

Select “MIC” by using the CATEGORY

[r] or [f] button, then set it to “ON”

by rotating the dial.

(If necessary, turn on the microphone.)

Adjust the MIC VOLUME knob while

singing into the microphone.

Adjust the MIC VOLUME knob so that the

INPUT LEVEL meter is not off the scale (or

“pinned” continuously to the right). If the INPUT

LEVEL meter is off the scale, distortion may be

produced.

• Make sure to use a conventional dynamic microphone.

NOTE

Disconnecting the microphone

Set the MIC VOLUME knob to the minimum posi-

tion then disconnect the microphone from the MIC

INPUT jack.

• You can assign the function of switching the MIC ON/OFF

to pedals. Refer to “Assigning specific functions to the

pedal” (page 21).

MIC ON/OFF INPUT LEVEL

NOTE

Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Selecting a Preset Setting

Press the [MIC SETTING] button once or

twice to call up the MIC SETTING 1 dis-

play.

Select “PRESET” by using the CATE-

GORY [r] or [f] button, then select

the desired one of “STANDARD”,

“BRIGHTER” and “LOUDER” by rotating

the dial.

If you want to make your original settings, set var-

ious parameters (including those on MIC SET-

TING 2) then save the setting as the USER data.

For details, see next section.

Making and Saving the Micro-

phone Settings

This section explains how to make and save the

detailed settings for the microphone. Only one group

of settings can be saved to USER data.

Connect a microphone to the instru-

ment, then press the [MIC SETTING] but-

ton once or twice to call up the MIC

SETTING 1 or 2 display.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button

to select the specific parameter to be

adjusted.

For information on each parameter, see below.

Set the value of the specific parameter

by rotating the dial.

STANDARD

The STANDARD setting provides optimum

response over the entire frequency spec-

trum ensuring all vocals sound good.

BRIGHTER

The BRIGHTER setting emphasizes

higher frequencies making vocals stand

out more in the mix.

LOUDER

The LOUDER setting compresses the

overall signal which increases both the

level of your voice and softer sounds.

MIC SETTING 1 display

MIC SETTING 2 display

Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

MIC SETTING 1 display

* The settings marked with * (asterisk) will be maintained even if

you turn off the power.

MIC SETTING 2 display

Press the [EXECUTE] button to save the

settings.

The save confirmation message will appear on the

display.

Press the [+] (YES) button to actually

save the settings.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the

MIC SETTING display.

Calling Up the Microphone Set-

tings Saved to USER

Press the [MIC SETTING] button once or

twice to call up the MIC SETTING 1 dis-

play.

Select “PRESET” by using the CATE-

GORY [r] or [f] button, then select

“USER” by rotating the dial.

MIC ON/

OFF*

Turns the microphone sound on or off.

INPUT

LEVEL

Indicates the input level.

PRESET*

Calls up one of the preset settings (STANDARD,

BRIGHTER and LOUDER) or the settings saved

as USER.

VOLUME

Determines the output volume of the microphone

sound.

PA N

Determines the stereo pan position of the micro-

phone sound.

EFFECT

SEND

REVERB

Determines the depth of the reverb

effect applied to the microphone

sound.

CHORUS

Determines the depth of the chorus

effect applied to the microphone

sound.

RESET

Resets the values of parameters on MIC SET-

TING 1 and 2 displays to the default when one of

the preset type is selected. When “USER” is

selected, this resets them to the latest saved

value.

NOISE

GATE

ON/OFF

Turns the Noise Gate on or off. This

effect mutes the input signal when

the input signal falls below a speci-

fied level.

TH.

(Threshold)

Adjusts the input level at which the

gate begins to open.

COMPRES-

SOR

ON/OFF

Turns the Compressor on or off. This

effect holds down the output when

the input signal from the micro-

phone exceeds a specified level.

TH.

(Threshold)

Adjusts the input level above which

the Compressor is applied.

RATIO

Adjusts the compression ratio.

Higher ratios result in a more com-

pressed sound, making soft sounds

louder, but reducing the dynamic

range.

OUT Adjusts the final output level.

3 BAND EQ

EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the fre-

quency spectrum into multiple bands which can

be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall

frequency response.

Adjusts the center frequency of the

corresponding band.

Boosts or cuts the level of the corre-

sponding band by up to 12 dB.

• The settings here are lost if you turn off the power without

executing the Save operation (See below).

NOTICE

• The Save operation will delete the previously saved

USER data.

• To cancel this operation, press the [-] (NO) button.

NOTICE

NOTE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

The Functions

The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as

Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. Take a look at the Function List (pages 73–75).

When you find the desired Function you want to change, follow the instructions below.

Find the desired item in the Function

List on pages 73–75.

Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up

the FUNCTION display.

Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] but-

tons several times until the desired item

appears.

Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or

the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the

value of the selected function.

To restore the default value, press the [+] and [-]

buttons simultaneously. In the sole case of the

MIDI Initial Send function, pressing the [+] button

executes the function while pressing [-] cancels it.

Some Function settings are maintained even if you

turn off the power, and can be transferred to the com-

puter as Backup Data (page 52).

Current item

Previous item

Value

Next item

Direct numeric

entry.

Press simultane-

ously to recall the

default setting.

• Increase

value by 1.

•ON

•Execute

• Decrease

value by 1.

•OFF

• Cancel

The Functions

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Function List

Category Function Range/Settings Default Value Description

Volume

Style Volume 000–127 100 Refer to page 63.

Song Volume 000–127 100 Refer to page 67.

Audio Volume 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Audio file.

Wireless LAN

Volume

000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Wireless LAN Audio.

AUX IN Level 000–127 100

Determines the volume of the sound input via the AUX IN

jack.

Overall

Transpose -12–+12 00 Refer to page 55.

Tuning 415.3Hz–466.2Hz 440.0Hz Refer to page 56.

Pitch Bend Range 01–12 02

Sets the range over which you can control pitch by using the

PITCH BEND wheel (page 56), in semitone increments.

Split Point 021 (A-1)–108 (C7) 054 (F#2) Refer to page 64.

Touch Response

1 (Soft)/

2 (Medium)/

3 (Hard)/

4 (Fixed)

2 (Medium) Refer to page 57.

Chord Fingering

1 (Multi Finger)/

2 (FullKeyboard)/

3 (AI Fingered)

1 (Multi Finger)

Refer to page 64.

Main Voice

(page 27)

Main Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Main Voice.

Main Octave -2–+2 * Determines the octave range for the Main voice.

Main Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the stereo pan position of the Main Voice. A

value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a

value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right.

Main Reverb Level 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to

the Reverb effect.

Main Chorus Level 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to

the Chorus effect.

Main DSP Level 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to

the DSP effect.

Dual Voice

(pages 28, 60)

Dual Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.

Dual Octave -2–+2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual voice.

Dual Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

Determines the stereo pan position of the Dual Voice. A

value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a

value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right.

Dual Reverb Level 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to

the Reverb effect.

Dual Chorus Level 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to

the Chorus effect.

Dual DSP Level 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to

the DSP effect.

Split Voice

(pages 28, 60)

Split Volume 000–127 080 Determines the volume of the Split Voice.

Split Octave -2–+2 0 Determines the octave range for the Split voice.

Split Pan

000 (left)–

64 (center)–

127 (right)

064

Determines the stereo pan position of the Split Voice. A

value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a

value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right.

Split Reverb Level 000–127 008

Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to

the Reverb effect.

Split Chorus Level 000–127 000

Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to

the Chorus effect.

The Functions

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Effect

Reverb Type 01–42 ** Refer to page 53.

Chorus Type 01–45 ** Refer to page 53.

DSP ON/OFF * Refer to page 54.

DSP Type 001–239 * Refer to page 54.

Damper Resonance ON/OFF ON Refer to page 21.

Sustain ON/OFF OFF Refer to page 55.

MASTER EQ Type

1 (Normal)/

2 (Piano)/

3 (Soft)/

4 (Bright)/

5 (Powerful)

1 (Normal) Refer to page 57.

Output Gain

Headphones/

Line Out/

Fixed

Headphones Refer to page 58.

I. A. Control ON/OFF ON Refer to page 59.

I. A. Control Depth -3–+3 0 Refer to page 59.

Harmony

(page 31)

Harmony Type 01–26 * Determines the Harmony type.

Harmony Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect.

Pedal

Assignable Pedal

SUSTAIN,

PORTAMENTO,

MIC ON/OFF,

START/STOP,

TAP TEMPO

SUSTAIN Refer to page 21.

Portamento Time 000–127 064

Determines the pitch transition time (page 21). Higher val-

ues result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0”

results in no effect.

(USB TO

HOST terminal)

PC Mode PC1/PC2/OFF OFF

Optimizes the MIDI settings when transmitting or receiving

the performance data between the computer and the instru-

ment (page 75).

MIDI***

Local ON/OFF ON

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the

internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record

your keyboard performance to the application software on

the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF.

External Clock ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the

internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you

record your keyboard performance to the application soft-

ware on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to ON.

Keyboard Out ON/OFF ON

Determines whether MIDI messages generated via key-

board performance are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from

the USB TO HOST terminal.

Style Out ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Style

playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB

TO HOST terminal.

Song Out ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Song

playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB

TO HOST terminal.

Initial Setup ON –

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer.

Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel during sending. This

operation should be done immediately after starting the

Recording operation on the computer.

Category Function Range/Settings Default Value Description

The Functions

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

* The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination.

** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song or Style.

*** For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 8).

PC Mode

The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). This setting is not necessary

when transferring files between the computer and the instrument via Musicsoft Downloader.

Metronome

(page 29)

Time Signature -

Numerator

1–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

Time Signature -

Denominator

2/4/8/16 ** Determines the length of each metronome beat.

Bell ON/OFF ON

Determines whether a bell accent will be sounded (ON) or

not (OFF).

Metronome Volume 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Score Quantize

1 (1/4 note)/

2 (1/4 note triplet)/

3 (1/8 note)/

4 (1/8 note triplet)/

5 (1/16 note)/

6 (1/16 note triplet)/

7 (1/32 note)/

8 (1/32 note triplet)

–

Depending on the Song data, you can make the score more

readable by adjusting the timing of the notes. This deter-

mines the minimum timing resolution used in the Song. For

example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in

the Song, you should set this value to “eighth note.” Any

notes or rests shorter than this value will not be shown in

the score.

Song/Lesson

Right-Part

CH 01, 02...15, 16,

OFF

CH 01

Determines the guide track number for your right hand les-

son. The setting is effective for Songs in SMF format 0 and

1 that are transferred from an external device.

Left-Part

CH 01, 02...15, 16,

OFF

CH 02

Determines the guide track number for your left hand les-

son. The setting is effective for Songs in SMF format 0 and

1 that are transferred from an external device.

Lesson Grade ON/OFF ON Determines whether the Grade function is on or off.

Demo

Demo Group

1 (Demo)/

2 (Preset)/

3 (User)/

4 (Download)/

5 (USB)

1 (Demo) Refer to page 66.

Demo Play Mode

1 (Normal)/

2 (Random)

1 (Normal) Refer to page 66.

Demo Cancel ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When

this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the

[DEMO/BGM] button is pressed.

Utility

Speaker Control

NORMAL/

ALWAYS ON

NORMAL Refer to page 58.

Auto Power Off

OFF/5/10/15/30/60/

120 (min.)

30 Refer to page 19.

PC1 PC2 OFF

Local OFF OFF ON

External Clock ON OFF OFF

Song Out OFF OFF OFF

Style Out OFF OFF OFF

Keyboard Out OFF ON ON

• Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument by the Song Out function, but User Songs can.

Category Function Range/Settings Default Value Description

NOTE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

To see where the connectors are located on the instrument, refer to pages 16, 17.

Connecting an Audio Device

(AUX IN jack)

You can connect the output jack of an external device

such as portable audio player to the instrument’s AUX

IN jack, letting you hear the sound of that device

through the built-in speakers of the instrument.

Connecting to a Computer (USB

TO HOST terminal)

By connecting a computer to the USB TO HOST ter-

minal, you can transfer data between the instrument

and the computer via MIDI. For details on using a

computer with this instrument, refer to “Computer-

related Operations” on the website (page 8).

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turn-

ing any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the components, elec-

trical shock, or even permanent hearing loss may occur.

CAUTION

• To avoid damaging the device, first turn on the power to

the external device, then to the instrument. When turning

off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument,

then to the external device.

• Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resis-

tance.

• You can adjust the volume of the sound input via the AUX IN

jack from the external audio device. To do this, press the

[FUNCTION] button then use the CATEGORY buttons to select

“AUX IN Level,” then adjust the value by using the dial.

NOTICE

Audio device (portable

audio player, etc.)

Stereo

mini plug

NOTE

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0

cables cannot be used.

• The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the

USB connection is made.

• When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your

computer, make the connection directly without passing

through a USB hub.

• For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to

the owner’s manual of the relevant software.

USB

terminal

USB TO HOST

terminal

USB

cable

Instrument

NOTICE

NOTE

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connecting to an iPhone/iPad

(USB TO DEVICE, USB TO

HOST terminals)

By connecting this instrument to a smart device, such

as an iPhone or iPad, you can use apps on that device

together with the instrument for a variety of musical

purposes, take advantage of various convenient func-

tions, and get more enjoyment out of this instrument.

Make connections by using one of the following

methods.

• Connect to the USB TO DEVICE terminal via the

USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 (sold sepa-

rately; may not be available in some areas).

• Connect to the USB TO HOST terminal via the

USB cable for iPhone/iPad.

For details on connections, refer to the “iPhone/iPad

Connection Manual” on the website (page 8) and the

“Wireless LAN Settings” (See next section).

For information about the compatible smart devices

and application tools, access the following page:

http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/

Wireless LAN Settings

By using the USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01

(sold separately), you can connect the instrument to

an iPhone/iPad via a wireless network. For general

operating instructions, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Con-

nection Manual” on the website (page 8). This section

covers operations that are specific to this instrument.

Turn off the power to the instrument.

Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor

UD-WL01 to the USB TO DEVICE termi-

nal of the instrument.

Turn on the power to the instrument.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call

up the FILE CONTROL display.

• Before using the USB TO DEVICE terminal, be sure to read

“Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on

page 80.

• Do not place your iPhone/iPad in an unstable position.

Doing so may cause the device to fall and result in dam-

age.

• When you use the instrument along with an application on

your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you first set “Airplane

Mode” to “ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad

in order to avoid noise caused by communication.

• Certain applications may not be supported in your area.

Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

NOTE

NOTICE

NOTE

Choosing the Connection Type

You can use one of connection modes: Infrastructure or

Access Point. Select one which is most suitable for your

network environment.

Infrastructure mode: The “Infrastructure” mode uses

an access point for data communication, between the

USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 and a net-

work.

Access Point mode: The “Access Point” mode allows

you to directly connect the USB wireless LAN adap-

tor UD-WL01 and your iPhone/iPad, without using

an access point. Please note that when your instru-

ment is set to Access Point mode, no Internet access

is available on your iPhone/iPad, limiting part of

their functions, such as mailing and searching.

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button

to select “Wireless LAN.”

Press the [EXECUTE] button to call up

the WIRELESS LAN display.

“WIRELESS LAN - Infrastructure Mode” is the

default setting.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button

to select the desired operation, then

press the [EXECUTE] button.

This operation lets you change the connection

mode.

For information on the WIRELESS LAN displays,

see the next section.

Infrastructure Mode

• When “Wireless LAN” cannot be found even though the

USB wireless LAN adaptor has been connected, turn the

instrument off then on again.

• For information on entering characters for the password

or settings, refer to page 83.

NOTE

Network list Select your personal network from this list to con-

nect automatically, or input the desired one manu-

ally. Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button to

select this area, and then follow the instructions

below.

Connecting to a network by selecting from the

list

1. Select the desired network by rotating the dial.

2. Press the [EXECUTE] button.

For a network without a lock icon, this finishes

connecting to the network.

For a network having a lock icon ( ), the

PASSWORD display appears.

3. Enter the password on the PASSWORD display

by rotating the dial.

4. Select “Connect” by using the CATEGORY [r]

or [f] button, then press the [EXECUTE] but-

ton.

Connecting to a network manually

1. Select “Other” displayed at the very end of the

list by rotating the dial.

2. Press the [EXECUTE] button to call up the

OTHER NETWORK display.

3. Make SSID, security, and password settings by

rotating the dial.

4. Select “Connect” by using the CATEGORY [r]

or [f] button, then press the [EXECUTE] but-

ton.

UPDATE Updates the network list on the display.

WPS Connects this instrument to the network via WPS.

1. Select “WPS” by using the CATEGORY [r] or

[f] button, then press the [EXECUTE] button.

2. Press the WPS button on your access point

within two minutes.

INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default fac-

tory status.

Network list

• Make sure that your access point supports

WPS. About the confirmation and changes in

the access point settings, refer to the manual

of the access point.

NOTE

Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Access Point Mode

For information on making settings for/on your

iPhone/iPad, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection

Manual” on the website (page 8).

DETAIL Set detailed parameters from the pages below.

Page 1/2: For setting the IP address and other

related parameters.

Page 2/2: For entering the Host name or show-

ing MAC address, etc.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button to select

the parameters, and then use the dial to set the

value. After making the settings, select “SAVE” on

page 2/2 by using the CATEGORY [r] or [f]

button, and press the [EXECUTE] button to actu-

ally save them.

MODE

CHANGE

Switches to the Access Point mode.

INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default fac-

tory status.

DETAIL Set detailed parameters from the pages below.

Page 1/2: For setting the SSID, channel, secu-

rity, password, IP address and other related

parameters.

Page 2/2: For entering the Host name or show-

ing MAC address, etc.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button to select

the parameters, and then use the dial to set the

value. After making the settings, select “SAVE” on

page 2/2 by using the CATEGORY [r] or [f]

button and press the [EXECUTE] button to actu-

ally save them.

MODE

CHANGE

Switches to the Infrastructure mode.

Displaying the wireless network settings.

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

USB Flash Drive Operations

By connecting the USB flash drive to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, you can save the

data created on this instrument, such as User Song and parameter settings. The saved

data can be recalled to this instrument again for future use.

Precautions when using the USB TO

DEVICE terminal

This instrument features a built-in USB TO

DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device

to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device

with care. Follow the important precautions below.

Compatible USB devices

• USB flash drive

• USB wireless LAN adaptor (UD-WL01) (may

not be available depending on your area)

Other USB devices such as a USB hub, computer

keyboard or mouse cannot be used.

The instrument does not necessarily support all

commercially available USB devices. Yamaha can-

not guarantee operation of USB devices that you

purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use

with this instrument, please visit the following web

page:

http://download.yamaha.com/

Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on

this instrument, the amount of time for saving to or

loading from the USB device may differ depending

on the type of data or the status of the instrument.

Connecting USB device

When connecting a USB device to the USB TO

DEVICE terminal, make sure that the connector on

the device is appropriate and that it is connected in

the proper direction.

Using a USB flash drive

By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive,

you can save data you’ve created to the connected

device, as well as read data from the connected

USB flash drive.

Maximum number of USB flash drive allowed

Only one USB flash drive can be connected to the

USB TO DEVICE terminal.

Formatting USB flash drive

You should format the USB flash drive only with

this instrument (page 82). A USB flash drive for-

matted on another device may not operate properly.

To protect your data (write-protect)

To prevent important data from being inadvertently

erased, apply the write-protect provided with each

USB flash drive. If you are saving data to the USB

flash drive, make sure to disable write-protect.

Turning off the instrument

When turning off the instrument, make sure that

the instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash

drive by playback/recording or file management

(such as during Save, Delete and Format opera-

tions). Failure to do so may corrupt the USB flash

drive and the data.

• For more information about the handling of USB devices,

refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device.

• The rating of the USB TO DEVICE terminal is a maximum

of 5V/500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating

above this, since this can cause damage to the instrument

itself.

NOTE

• Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device

during playback/recording and file management opera-

tions (such as Save, Delete and Format), or when

accessing the USB device. Failure to observe this may

result in “freezing” of the operation of the instrument

or corruption of the USB device and the data.

• When connecting then disconnecting the USB device

(and vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds

between the two operations.

• When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length

is less than 3 meters.

• The format operation overwrites any previously existing

data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are format-

ting does not contain important data.

NOTICE

NOTE

NOTICE

USB Flash Drive Operations

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connecting a USB Flash Drive

Connect a USB flash drive to the USB

TO DEVICE terminal, being careful to

insert it with the proper orientation.

Wait for confirmation that the USB flash

drive has been properly mounted.

A message (information or confirmation dialog)

sometimes appears on the display to facilitate

operation. Refer to the “Messages” on page 89 for

an explanation of each message.

Mounting

(Flashing)

Mounted

(Lit)

Calling up the FILE CONTROL display

Pressing the [FILE CONTROL] button while the USB

flash drive is connected to the USB TO DEVICE termi-

nal calls up the FILE CONTROL display.

You can access file operations listed below by pressing

the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons from the FILE

CONTROL display.

If you press the [FILE CONTROL] button while an

unformatted USB flash drive is connected to the instru-

ment, the “Format” function will automatically be

selected.

To exit from the FILE CONTROL display press the

[EXIT] button.

Menu Reference page

Format 82

Regist Save 83

User Song Save 84

Audio Save 85

Load 86

USB Delete 87

User Delete 87

• No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard

while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Also, in

this state only buttons related to file functions will be

active.

• The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of

the following cases:

• During Style, Song or Audio playback.

• During Lesson and Style Recommender.

• While data is being loaded from a USB flash

drive.

NOTE

USB Flash Drive Operations

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Formatting a USB Flash Drive

The Format operation lets you prepare commercially

available USB flash drive for use with this instrument.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call

up the FILE CONTROL display.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons

to call up “Format.”

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-] (NO) button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again or

the [+] (YES) button to execute the For-

mat operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears, and the “USER FILES”

folder will be created on the root directory in the

USB flash drive.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the

FILE CONTROL display.

• If a USB flash drive that contains data is formatted as

described below, the data will be erased. Make sure that a

USB flash drive to be formatted contains no important data

before carrying out the formatting procedure.

• The Format operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB

flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result

in data loss.

NOTICE

USB Flash Drive Operations

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving a Registration Memory to USB Flash Drive

This operation saves a Registration Memory to a USB

flash drive device. The file name will have a “.usr”

extension which does not appear in the instrument’s

display.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call

up the FILE CONTROL display.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons

to call up “Regist Save.”

A default file name will automatically be created.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A cursor will appear below the first character in

the file name.

Change the file name as necessary.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-] (NO) button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] (YES) button to execute the Save

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Registration Memory will be saved in a folder

labeled “USER FILES” which will automatically

be created on the USB flash drive.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the

FILE CONTROL display.

To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on

the USB flash drive, use the dial or the [+] and [-]

buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 5.

• Up to 100 User files can be saved to a single USB flash

drive.

NOTE

Cursor

Entering Characters

The [-] button moves the cursor to the left, and the

[0] button moves it to the right.

Use the dial to select a character for the current cur-

sor location.

The [+] button deletes the character at the cursor

location.

• If an existing file name is specified, the display

prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+]

if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel.

• The Save operation cannot be cancelled during execu-

tion. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB

flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result

in data loss.

• If you want to recall the Registration Memory (.usr) to this

instrument again, execute the Load operation (page 86).

• The amount of time it will take to perform the Save opera-

tion will depend on the condition of the USB flash drive.

The dial selects

characters

Delete

character

Cursor

right

Cursor

left

NOTICE

NOTE

USB Flash Drive Operations

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving a User Song to USB Flash Drive

This operation saves a User Song (Song numbers

101–105) to USB flash drive.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call

up the FILE CONTROL display.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons

to call up “User Song Save.”

The SOURCE FILE—a User Song name—will be

highlighted.

Use the dial to select the User Song you

want to save.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

The DESTINATION FILE parameter will be high-

lighted, and a default name will automatically be

created.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A cursor will appear below the first character in

the file name.

Change the file name as necessary.

Refer to “Saving a Registration Memory to USB

Flash Drive” on page 83 for filename entry.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-] (NO) button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] (YES) button to execute the Save

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

The User Song will be saved in a folder labeled

“USER FILES” which will automatically be cre-

ated on the USB flash drive.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the

FILE CONTROL display.

To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on

the USB flash drive, use the dial to select the file,

then skip ahead to step 7.

The source User

Song name.

• If an existing file name is specified, the display

prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+]

if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel.

• The Save operation cannot be cancelled during execu-

tion. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB

flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result

in data loss.

• The amount of time it will take to perform the Save opera-

tion will depend on the condition of the USB flash drive.

The name of the

file to be saved

Cursor

NOTICE

NOTE

USB Flash Drive Operations

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Converting a User Song to an Audio file

This operation converts a User Song (Song numbers

101–105) to an Audio file and saves the file to the

USB flash drive.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call

up the FILE CONTROL display.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons

to call up “Audio Save.”

The SOURCE FILE—a User Song name—will be

highlighted.

Use the dial to select the User Song you

want to convert.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

The DESTINATION AUDIO FILE parameter will

be highlighted, and a default name will automati-

cally be created.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-] (NO) button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] (YES) button to execute the Save

(Convert) operation.

This operation starts playback and conversion

from a User Song to an audio file. If you input

audio signals via the AUX IN jack during conver-

sion, that sound also will be recorded.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

The Audio file will be saved in a folder labeled

“USER FILES” which will automatically be cre-

ated on the USB flash drive.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the

FILE CONTROL display.

• Only User Songs can be converted to Audio files.

To Overwrite an Existing File

If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on

the USB flash drive, use the dial to select the file,

then go on to the next step.

NOTE

The source User

Song name.

• If an existing file name is specified, the display

prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+]

if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel.

• Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash

drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data

loss.

• The amount of time it takes to perform the Save operation

depends on the condition of the USB flash drive.

NOTICE

NOTE

USB Flash Drive Operations

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Loading Files from a USB Flash Drive

Registration Memory, Style file and Song file (SMF)

residing on a USB flash drive can be loaded into the

instrument.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call

up the FILE CONTROL display.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons

to call up “Load.”

Use the dial to select the file you want to

load.

All Registration Memory files in the USB flash

drive will be displayed first, followed by the Style

files and Song files.

Files must be located in the “USER FILES” folder

in the USB flash drive. Files located outside of

that folder will not be recognized.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-] (NO) button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] (YES) button to execute the Load

operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the

FILE CONTROL display.

• If you load a Registration Memory, data will be overwritten

by the newly loaded data. Save important data to a USB

flash drive before loading data that will overwrite it.

NOTICE

• The Load operation cannot be cancelled during execu-

tion. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB

flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result

in data loss.

NOTICE

USB Flash Drive Operations

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Deleting files from a USB Flash

Drive

This procedure deletes Registration Memory, Style

file, Song file and Audio file from a USB flash drive.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call

up the FILE CONTROL display.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons

to call up “USB Delete.”

Use the dial to select the file you want to

delete.

All Registration Memory files in the USB flash

drive will be displayed first, followed by the Song

files, Audio files and Style files.

Files must be located in the “User Files” folder in

the USB flash drive. Files located outside of that

folder will not be recognized.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-] (NO) button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] (YES) button to execute the

Delete operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the

FILE CONTROL display.

Deleting User Data from the

Instrument

This procedure deletes User Song files as well as

Style and Song files loaded or transferred from an

external device such as a computer. This operation

does not erase the Preset data.

Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call

up the FILE CONTROL display.

Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons

to call up “User Delete.”

Only “User Delete” can be selected if no USB

flash drive is connected to the instrument.

Use the dial to select the file you want to

delete.

All User Songs will be displayed first, followed by

the Song and Style files.

Press the [EXECUTE] button.

A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the

operation, press the [-] (NO) button.

Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or

the [+] (YES) button to execute the

Delete operation.

After a while, a message indicating completion of

the operation appears.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the

FILE CONTROL display.

• The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB

flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result

in data loss.

NOTICE

• The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during exe-

cution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB

flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result

in data loss.

NOTICE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Troubleshooting

For the Instrument

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical

power.

The power is automatically turned off. This is normal and due to the Auto Power Off function. If necessary, set

the parameter of the Auto Power Off function (page 19).

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce

interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further

away from the instrument.

Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or

headphones when using the instrument with an

iPhone/iPad application.

When you use the instrument along with an iPhone/iPad application, we

recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad in

order to avoid noise caused by communication.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is

played or when a Style or Song is being played

back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the

rear panel. When a plug is connected to this jack, no sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off setting (“Local”). (See page 74.)

Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard,

etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is

showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display.

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard

does not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 65), the keys in the right hand

area are used only for entering the chord root and type.

The Style or Song does not play back when the

[START/STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF;

refer to “External Clock” on page 74.

The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 63) is set to an appropriate level.

Is the Split Point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are play-

ing? Set the Split Point at an appropriate key (page 64).

Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press

the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/

STOP] button is pressed after selecting style num-

ber 174 or a style between 188–205 (Pianist).

This is not a malfunction. Style number 174 and style numbers 188–205

(Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts

will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of

the keyboard if the ACMP is turned on.

Not all simultaneously played notes sound. You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony (page 90) of the

instrument. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, the earliest

played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the

opposite effect. For example, pressing the foot-

switch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains

the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch

plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the

power.

The sound of the Voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple record-

ings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus,

the actual sound of the Voice may be slightly different from note to note.

The appropriate display does not appear when the

[SONG/AUDIO], [STYLE], or [VOICE] button is

pressed.

Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return to

the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons.

The ACMP indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any

Style-related function.

The “Over Current” message is shown in the upper

left area of the MAIN display and the USB device

does not respond.

Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of

the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB

TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument.

The Headphone sound is too low. Make sure the parameter of “Output Gain” is set to “Headphones” (page

58).

Appendix

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Messages

LCD Message Comment

Access error! Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash memory.

Clearing all memory... Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power off during

data transmission.

Data Error! Displayed when the Song or Style contains illegal data.

File information area is not large enough. Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total number of

files have become too many.

File is not found. Indicates there is no file.

File too large. Loading is impossible. Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too large.

Media capacity is full. Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory has

become full.

Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during Song recording.

MIDI receive buffer overflow. Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to proceed.

Over Current Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent

to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then

turn on the power of the instrument.

Save OK ? [YES]/[NO] Confirms whether saving is executed or not. Press the [+] (YES) button to save the

recorded Song. To cancel saving, press the [-] (NO) button at the prompt.

Save data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist.

Since the media is in use now, this function

is not available.

Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being

accessed.

Since the recorded song has not been

saved, the operation cannot be performed.

This message appears if you attempt to convert the User Song to audio file when

there is any recorded Song which is not saved. When this message appears, press

the [EXIT] button to exit from the FILE CONTROL display, then save the recorded

Song which is not saved. To save the Song, hold down the [REC] button until the

save confirmation message appears, then press the [+] (YES) button.

The limit of the media has been reached. Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory structure has

become too complicated.

The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted.

The media is write-protected. Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-protected. Set to

the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use.

The notation cannot be displayed, since

this song is not allowed to display the

notation.

This message will appear if you attempt to display the score of a Song for which

score display is prohibited.

The song data is too large to be converted

to notation.

Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the Song data is too large.

The number of files exceeds the system

limit. Delete existing files to add new ones.

Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds

the capacity.

This drive is busy now. This message appears when processing lags behind Audio playback or recording.

This function is not available now. Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is executing

another job.

• Not all the messages are listed in the table; only messages needing explanation are included.

NOTE

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Specifications

Product Name Digital Piano

Size/Weight

Dimensions (W x D x H)

1,397 x 445 x 146 mm (55” x 17-1/2” x 5-3/4”)

with keyboard stand: 1,399 x 445 x 761 mm (55-1/16” x

17-1/2” x 29-15/16”)

Weight

21kg (46 lbs. 5 oz.)

with keyboard stand: 28kg (61 lbs. 12 oz.)

Control

Interface

Keyboard

Number of Keys 88

Type GHS (Graded Hammer Standard) keyboard

Touch Response Soft, Medium, Hard, Fixed

Other Controllers Pitch Bend Wheel Yes

Display

Type Full Dot LCD

Size 320 x 240 dots

Color Monochrome

Contrast Yes

Score Display Function Yes

Lyrics Display Function Yes

Language English

Panel Language English

Voices

Tone Generation

Piano Sound Pure CF Sound Engine

Damper Resonance Yes

Polyphony

Number of Polyphony

(max.)

192

Preset

Number of Voices 151 + 15 Drum/SFX Kits + 388 XGlite

Featured Voices

1 Natural! Voice, 10 Live! Voices, 11 Sweet! Voices, 7 Cool!

Voices

Compatibility GM, XGlite

Effects

Ty pe s

Reverb 41 types

Chorus 44 types

DSP 237 types

Master EQ 5 types

Harmony 26 types

Intelligent Acoustic Control

(IAC)

Ye s

Mic Effects Noise Gate, Compressor, 3 Band EQ

Functions

Dual Yes

Split Yes

Panel Sustain Yes (Function Menu)

Styles

Preset

Number of Styles 205

Fingering Multi Finger, Full Keyboard, AI Fingered

Style Control INTRO, MAIN x 2, FILL-IN x 2, ENDING

Other Features

Music Database 320

One Touch Setting (OTS) Yes

Style Recommender Yes

Smart Chord Yes

Compatibility Style File Format (SFF), Style File Format GE (SFF GE)

Songs (MIDI)

Preset Number of Preset Songs 100

Recording

Number of Songs 5

Number of Tracks 6 (5 Melody + 1 Chord)

Data Capacity Approx. 30,000 notes for 1 user song

Compatible Data

Format

Playback SMF (Format 0, Format 1), XF

Recording SMF (Format 0)

USB Audio

Recorder/Player

Recording Time (max.) 80 minutes/Song

Data Format

Playback WAV (44.1 kHz, 16 bit, stereo)

Recording WAV (44.1 kHz, 16 bit, stereo)

Functions

Registration

Memory

Number of Buttons 4 (x 8 banks)

Lesson

Yamaha Education Suite

(Y.E.S.)

Waiting, Your tempo, Minus one, Repeat & Learn, Chord

Dictionary

Demo Yes

Overall Controls

Metronome Yes

Tempo 5 - 280

Transpose -12 to 0, 0 to +12

Tuning 415.3 – 440.0 – 466.2 Hz

Miscellaneous Piano Room Yes

Specifications

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the printing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website

then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please

check with your Yamaha dealer.

Storage and

Connectivity

Storage

Internal Memory Approx. 1.7 MB

External Drives USB flash drive

Connectivity

DC IN 12V

Headphones/Output x 1 (Standard stereo phone jack)

Microphone Yes (Standard phone jack)

Sustain Pedal Yes

AUX IN Yes (Stereo mini jack)

PEDAL UNIT Yes

USB TO DEVICE Yes

USB TO HOST Yes

Amplifiers/

Speakers

Amplifiers 6W x 2

Speakers 12cm x 2 + 5cm x 2

Power Supply

Adaptor PA-150 or the equivalent

Power Consumption 13W

Auto Power Off Yes

Included Accessories

• Owner’s Manual

• Data List

• Keyboard Stand

• Footswitch

• Music Rest

• AC Power Adaptor (PA-150 or an equivalent recommended

by Yamaha)

• Warranty

• Online Member Product Registration

*1: May not be included depending on your area. Check with your

Yamaha dealer.

*2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out

the User Registration form.

Separately Sold Accessories

(May not be available depending on your area.)

• AC Power Adaptor: PA-150 or an equivalent recommended

by Yamaha

• Headphones: HPH-50/HPH-100/HPH-150

• Pedal Unit: LP-7A/LP-7AWH

• Foot Pedal: FC3A

• Footswitch: FC4A/FC5

• USB wireless LAN adaptor: UD-WL01

• Wireless MIDI Adaptor: UD-BT01

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Index

Symbols

[-] and [+] buttons ........................ 24

A-B Repeat ................................... 40

Access Point mode ................ 77, 79

Accessories .................................... 8

ACMP ........................................... 32

Assembly ...................................... 12

Assignable Pedal ......................... 21

Audio ...................................... 38, 66

Audio player ................................ 76

AUDIO SELECT display ...........39

Auto Accompaniment ................. 32

Auto Accompaniment range ....... 32

Auto Power Off ............................ 19

Background music (BGM) .........66

Backup .......................................... 52

Bank number ................................ 50

Bell ................................................ 30

CATEGORY buttons ................... 24

Channel ........................................ 68

Character entry ............................ 83

Chord Dictionary ......................... 65

Chord Fingering ..................... 34, 64

Chorus .......................................... 53

Compatible format ....................... 10

Computer ...................................... 76

Computer-related Operations ....... 8

Connection ........... 20, 21, 22, 76, 80

CONTRAST ................................ 23

Convert ......................................... 85

Damper Resonance ................ 21, 25

Data List ......................................... 8

Delete (from flash memory) .......87

Delete (from USB flash drive) ...87

Delete (User Song) ...................... 48

Demo ............................................ 38

Dial ............................................... 24

DSP ............................................... 54

Dual Voice .............................. 28, 60

Effect ............................................ 74

Ending .......................................... 61

EQ ................................................. 57

Fast Forward ................................ 40

File Control .................................. 81

Fill-in ............................................ 61

Footswitch .................................... 21

Formatting (USB flash drive) .....82

Function List ................................ 73

Functions ......................................72

Half Pedal .....................................22

Harmony .......................................31

Headphones ..................................20

Infrastructure mode ................77, 78

Initialization .................................52

Intelligent Acoustic Control

(IAC)

...................................19, 59

Intro ...............................................61

iPhone/iPad ...................................77

iPhone/iPad Connection Manual ..8

Lesson ...........................................42

Lid position ..................................25

Load ..............................................86

Lyrics ............................................41

Main ..............................................61

MAIN display ..............................23

Main Voice ...................................27

Master EQ .....................................57

Messages .......................................89

Metronome ...................................29

MIC .........................................21, 71

Microphone ..................................69

MIDI .......................................44, 74

MIDI Reference .............................8

Music Database ............................33

Music Rest ......................................8

Mute ..............................................40

Number buttons ............................24

Output Gain Level .......................58

Overview Demo ...........................38

Panel settings ................................50

Pause .............................................40

Pedal unit ......................................22

Piano Reset ...................................27

Piano Room ..................................25

Pitch ..................................25, 55, 56

PITCH BEND wheel ...................56

Playback .......................................39

Portamento ...................................21

Power On/Off ...............................18

Power requirements .....................18

Practice .........................................42

Quantize ........................................75

Random Playback ........................ 66

Recording (Audio) ...................... 49

Recording (Piano Room) ............ 26

Recording (Song Track) ............. 46

Recording (Song) ........................ 44

Registration Memory .................. 50

Repeat & Learn ........................... 43

Repeat playback .......................... 40

Reverb .......................................... 53

Rewind ......................................... 40

Rhythm ......................................... 32

Save (USB flash drive) ......... 83, 84

Score ............................................. 41

Sections ........................................ 61

Smart Chord ................................. 35

Song ........................................ 38, 66

Song Book ..................................... 8

SONG SELECT display ............. 39

Speaker On/Off ............................ 58

Split Point .............................. 32, 64

Split Voice .............................. 28, 60

Stop Accompaniment .................. 63

Style ........................................ 32, 61

Style Recommender .................... 37

Sustain .................................... 21, 55

Synchro Start ......................... 33, 61

Synchro Stop ............................... 62

Tap Start ....................................... 63

Tap Tempo ................................... 21

Tempo ........................................... 63

Time signature ............................. 29

Touch Response ..................... 25, 57

Track On/Off ................................ 40

Transpose ..................................... 55

Troubleshooting ........................... 88

Tuning .................................... 25, 56

USB Flash Drive ......................... 80

USER FILES folder ........ 82, 83, 86

User Song ..................................... 44

Vo i c e ....................................... 27, 60

Volume (Audio) ........................... 67

Volume (Main Voice,

Dual Voice, Split Voice)

.......... 73

Volume (Master) .......................... 19

Volume (Song) ............................. 67

Volume (Style) ............................. 63

Wireless LAN .............................. 77

WPS .............................................. 78

DGX-660 Owner’s Manual

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment

This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not

be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your

national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human

health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or

the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask

for the correct method of disposal.

(weee_eu_en_01)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også

selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in

your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of

the three pin plug.

(2 wires)

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1,

Canada

Tel: +1-416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: +1-714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.

Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José

Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,

D.F., C.P. 03900

Tel: +52-55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B –

Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP,

Brazil

Tel: +55-11-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,

Sucursal Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,

Madero Este-C1107CEK,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: +54-11-4119-7000

VENEZUELA

Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A.

AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza,

Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela

Tel: +58-212-943-1877

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama,

P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, U.K.

Tel: +44-1908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-303-0

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen,

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: +41-44-3878080

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: +43-1-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: +43-1-60203900

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/

ESTONIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland

Tel: +48-22-880-08-88

BULGARIA

Dinacord Bulgaria LTD.

Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa

1528 Sofia, Bulgaria

Tel: +359-2-978-20-25

MALTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta

Tel: +356-2133-2093

NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/

LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: +31-347-358040

FRANCE

Yamaha Music Europe

7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,

77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France

Tel: +33-1-6461-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: +39-02-93577-1

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231

Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain

Tel: +34-91-639-88-88

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,

Greece

Tel: +30-210-6686260

SWEDEN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial

Scandinavia

JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: +46-31-89-34-00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Denmark,

Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland

Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark

Tel: +45-44-92-49-00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Antaksentie 4

FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland

Tel: +358 (0)96185111

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, 1361 Østerås, Norway

Tel: +47-6716-7800

ICELAND

Hljodfaerahusid Ehf.

Sidumula 20

IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: +354-525-5050

CROATIA

Euro Unit D.O.O.

Slakovec 73

40305 Nedelisce

Tel: +38540829400

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.

Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,

Moscow, 121059, Russia

Tel: +7-495-626-5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-303-0

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,

Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971-4-801-1500

TURKEY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi

Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz

Böl. No:3, Sanyer Istanbul, Turkey

Tel: +90-212-999-8010

CYPRUS

Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd.

Nikis Ave 2k

1086 Nicosia

Tel: + 357-22-511080

Major Music Center

21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy

P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus

Tel: (392) 227 9213

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,

Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971-4-801-1500

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: +86-400-051-7700

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: +852-2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Private Limited

Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A,

Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002,

Haryana, India

Tel: +91-124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: +62-21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,

Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea

Tel: +82-2-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.

No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: +60-3-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited

Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

Tel: +65-6740-9200

TAIWAN

Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd.

2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist.

New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan

Tel: +886-2-7741-8888

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: +66-2215-2622

VIETNAM

Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited

15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach

Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,

Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam

Tel: +84-8-3818-1122

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

http://asia.yamaha.com

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Vic. 3006, Australia

Tel: +61-3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: +64-9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

http://asia.yamaha.com

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

DMI12

HEAD OFFICE: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Manual Development Department

Published 10/2015 POGR*.*-**A0

Printed in Indonesia

ZS39130

Yamaha Global Site

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Documenttranscriptie

Setting Up Reference Basic Guide Owner’s Manual We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 5–6. Appendix Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Piano! Keyboard Stand Assembly For information on assembling the keyboard stand, refer to the instructions on page 12 of this manual. EN For DGX-660 SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less ) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. Model ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. 92-BP (bottom) 2 DGX-660 Serial No. Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL For DGX-660 COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Address : Telephone : Type of Equipment : Model Name : Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 714-522-9011 Digital Piano DGX-660 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) For AC adaptor and DGX-660 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) DGX-660 3 For AC adaptor This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. (fcc_sengen) CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (can_b_01) Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (UL60065_03) 4 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. For AC adaptor WARNING CAUTION • This AC adaptor is designed for use with only Yamaha electronic instruments. Do not use for any other purpose. • Indoor use only. Do not use in any wet environments. • When setting up, make sure that the AC outlet is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch of the instrument and disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet. When the AC adaptor is connected to the AC outlet, keep in mind that electricity is flowing at the minimum level, even if the power switch is turned off. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. For DGX-660 WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, or place heavy objects on it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 91) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Some object has been dropped into the instrument. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. DMI-5 1/2 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 5 CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC adaptor Connections • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. Handling caution Assembly • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. Location • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • When transporting or moving the instrument, always use two or more people. Attempting to lift the instrument by yourself may damage your back, result in other injury, or cause damage to the instrument itself. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip over them. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching it, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the [ ] (Standby/On) switch is in standby status (display is off), electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. DMI-5 6 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 2/2 NOTICE To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  Handling • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.  Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft and dry/slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, alcohol, cleaning fluids, or chemicalimpregnated wiping cloths. • During extreme changes in temperature or humidity, condensation may occur and water may collect on the surface of the instrument. If water is left, the wooden parts may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to wipe any water off immediately with a soft cloth.  Saving data • Some of the data of this instrument (page 52) are retained when the power is turned off. However, the saved data may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto USB flash drive/an external device such as a computer (page 76). For information about the handling of USB flash drive, refer to page 80. • The recorded Songs are lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. This also occurs when the power is turned off by the Auto Power Off function (page 19). Save the data to the instrument, or to USB flash drive/an external device such as a computer (page 76). However, the data saved to the instrument may be lost due to some failure, an operation mistake, etc. Save your important data onto USB flash drive/an external device such as a computer (page 76). For information about the handling of USB flash drive, refer to page 80. • To protect against data loss through USB flash drive damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto spare USB flash drive or an external device such as a computer as backup data. Information  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which Yamaha has license to use others' copyrights. Due to copyright laws and other relevant laws, you are NOT allowed to distribute media in which these contents are saved or recorded and remain virtually the same or very similar to those in the product. * The contents described above include a computer program, Accompaniment Style data, MIDI data, WAVE data, voice recording data, a score, score data, etc. * You are allowed to distribute medium in which your performance or music production using these contents is recorded, and the permission of Yamaha Corporation is not required in such cases.  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Apple, iPhone, iPad and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., may be found on or near the name plate, which is at the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. The name plate is located on the bottom of the unit. (bottom_en_01) DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 7 About Manuals This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.  Included Documents Owner’s Manual (this book) • Setting Up Please read this section first. • Basic Guide This section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while playing the instrument. • Reference This section explains how to make detailed settings for the various functions of the instrument. • Appendix This section includes troubleshooting information and specifications. Data List Contains various important preset content lists such as those of Voices, Styles, and Effects.  Online Materials (from Yamaha Downloads) MIDI Reference Contains MIDI related information such as MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains basic explanations about MIDI. iPhone/iPad Connection Manual (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Explains how to connect the instrument to smart devices, such as an iPhone, iPad, etc. Computer-related Operations Includes instructions on connecting this instrument to a computer, and operations related to transferring files and MIDI data. To obtain these manuals, access the Yamaha Downloads, enter the model name for searching the desired files. Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/  Online Material (for Yamaha Online members) Song Book (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Contains music scores for the preset Songs (excluding the Over View Demo Song and Songs 1–11) of this instrument. After completing the user registration at the website below, you can download this Song Book free of charge. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ You will need the PRODUCT ID on the sheet “Online Member Product Registration” packaged with this manual in order to fill out the User Registration form. Included Accessories • Owner’s Manual (this book) • Data List • Keyboard Stand (page 12) • Footswitch (page 21) • Music Rest • AC Adaptor *1 • Warranty *1 • Online Member Product Registration *2 *1: May not be included depending on your particular locale. Check with your Yamaha dealer. *2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. 8 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Music Rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. Table of Contents Keyboard Stand Assembly 12 Panel Controls and Terminals 16 Front Panel.....................................................................16 Rear Panel .....................................................................17 Setting Up 18 Power Requirements......................................................18 Turning the Power On/Off ..............................................18 Setting the Volume .........................................................19 Auto Power Off Function ................................................19 Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) .........................................20 Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack).....................21 Connecting a Pedal Unit (PEDAL UNIT jack).................22 MAIN Display 23 Basic Controls 24 Basic Guide Enjoying Piano Performance (Piano Room) 25 Playing a Piano Performance in the Piano Room ..........25 Recording your Performance as Audio in the Piano Room ...26 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 27 Selecting a Main Voice...................................................27 Playing the “Grand Piano” (Piano Reset) .......................27 Layering Two Voices—Dual Voice .................................28 Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area ....................28 Using the Metronome .....................................................29 Adding Harmony ............................................................31 Playing Styles 32 Using the Music Database .............................................33 Chords............................................................................34 Using the Smart Chord feature ......................................35 Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance (Style Recommender) ................................................37 Playing Songs and Audio Files 38 Listening to the Overview Demo ....................................38 Playing Back a Song or Audio File .................................39 Fast Forward, Rewind, and Pause .................................40 A-B Repeat.....................................................................40 Turning Each Track On/Off ............................................40 Displaying the Song Score .............................................41 Displaying the Lyrics ......................................................41 Using the Song Lesson Feature 42 Three Types of Song Lesson .........................................42 Practicing with Song Lesson ..........................................42 Making Practice Perfect—Repeat & Learn.....................43 Recording Your Performance 44 Song Recording .............................................................44 Recording to a Specified Track ......................................46 Clearing a User Song .....................................................48 Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song ................48 Audio Recording.............................................................49 Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings 50 Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory....50 Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory ...51 Backup Parameters and Initialization 52 53 Selecting a Reverb Type................................................53 Selecting a Chorus Type................................................53 Selecting a DSP Type ....................................................54 Panel Sustain .................................................................55 Pitch Controls—Transpose ............................................55 Pitch Controls—Tuning ..................................................56 Pitch Controls—the PITCH BEND wheel .......................56 Touch Response Sensitivity...........................................57 Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound ..................57 Setting the Output Gain Level ........................................58 Speaker On/Off Setting ..................................................58 Intelligent Acoustic Control (IAC) ...................................59 Voice Settings Setting Up Setting Up Handy Performance Features 60 Selecting a Dual Voice ...................................................60 Selecting a Split Voice ...................................................60 Voice Editing ..................................................................60 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 61 Style Variations—Sections.............................................61 Changing the Tempo .....................................................63 Adjusting the Volume of the Style ..................................63 Playing Chords Without Style Playback (Stop Accompaniment) ..............................................63 Setting the Split Point.....................................................64 Setting the Chord Fingering ...........................................64 Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary ............65 Song and Audio Settings 66 Basic Guide 11 Background Music (BGM) Playback ..............................66 Random Playback ..........................................................66 Tempo Setting of the Song ............................................67 Song Volume .................................................................67 Audio Volume.................................................................67 Changing the Voice of the Song ....................................68 Specifying the Channel for the Lesson Part...................68 Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance 69 Connecting a Microphone ..............................................69 Selecting a Preset Setting..............................................70 Making and Saving the Microphone Settings.................70 Calling Up the Microphone Settings Saved to USER.....71 The Functions 72 Function List...................................................................73 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Reference Special Features Reference 76 Connecting an Audio Device (AUX IN jack) ...................76 Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal)....76 Connecting to an iPhone/iPad (USB TO DEVICE, USB TO HOST terminals)..........................................77 Wireless LAN Settings ...................................................77 USB Flash Drive Operations 80 Connecting a USB Flash Drive ......................................81 Formatting a USB Flash Drive .......................................82 Saving a Registration Memory to USB Flash Drive .......83 Saving a User Song to USB Flash Drive........................84 Converting a User Song to an Audio file ........................85 Loading Files from a USB Flash Drive ...........................86 Deleting files from a USB Flash Drive............................87 Deleting User Data from the Instrument.........................87 Appendix Troubleshooting........................................................... 88 Messages...................................................................... 89 Specifications............................................................... 90 Index.............................................................................. 92 Backup Parameters........................................................52 Initialization ....................................................................52 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 9 Appendix About Manuals .................................................................8 Included Accessories .......................................................8 Compatible Format.........................................................10 Compatible Format GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. XF The Yamaha XF format enhances the SMF (Standard MIDI File) standard with greater functionality and open-ended expandability for the future. The instrument is capable of displaying lyrics when an XF file containing lyric data is played. Style File Format Guitar Edition “SFF (Style File Format)” is an original Style file format by Yamaha which uses a unique conversion system to provide high-quality automatic accompaniment based on a wide range of chord types. “SFF GE (Guitar Edition)” is an enhanced format of SFF, which features improved note transposition for guitar tracks. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. 10 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Special Features Amazingly Authentic Piano Sound and “Piano Room” Performance Controls Page 27, 25 The DGX-660 features an authentically expressive piano Voice (“Natural! Grand Piano”; Voice 001) meticulously sampled from a concert grand piano—perfect for playing not only classical compositions but also piano pieces in any style. No matter what instrument settings have been made, you can instantly call up the Piano Voice by simply pressing and holding the [PIANO ROOM] button. In addition, the instrument has a special Piano Room feature that provides even greater piano performance enjoyment with highly intuitive control. Piano Room lets you select the desired piano type as well as different room ambiences, giving you a complete, realistic piano experience—as if you were playing a real piano. Graded Hammer Standard Keyboard Thanks to our experience as the world’s leading manufacturer of acoustic pianos, we’ve developed a keyboard with action that’s virtually indistinguishable from the real thing. Just as on a traditional acoustic piano, the keys of the lower notes have a heavier touch, while the higher ones are more responsive to lighter playing. The keyboard’s sensitivity can even be adjusted to match your playing style. This Graded Hammer technology gives the DGX-660 remarkably authentic touch in a lightweight instrument. Amazingly Realistic and Dynamic Sounds Page 27 Yamaha’s authentic Voices (especially the highly acclaimed Live!, Sweet! and Cool! Voices) deliver incredibly natural and dynamic sound—with all the nuances of the original instrument, from delicate to powerful. Play Along with Styles Page 32 The DGX-660 also has complete and fully automatic accompaniment features with the Styles. These Styles provide the equivalent of a full backing band covering wide variety of genres—from waltz and swing to 8-beat and euro-trance, plus much more. Select a Style that matches the music you want to play, or experiment with new Styles to expand your musical horizons. And if it’s difficult to select the right Style from the huge variety available, use the Style Recommender function, which calls up a list of suggested Styles, based on a sample rhythm you play. Also, this instrument features a Smart Chord function, allowing you to simply press single keys, and yet play various chord progressions that authentically match the music genre and key you specify—giving you even greater enjoyment from the Styles! Easy Performance with Music Notation Display Page 41 When you play back a Song, the corresponding score is shown on the display. This is a great way to learn how to read music. If the Song contains lyric and chord data, the lyrics and chords also appear in the score. Connect a Microphone and Sing Along with Your Own Performance Page 69 Simply connect a microphone to the DGX-660, sing along with your keyboard performance or with Song playback—and hear everything mixed perfectly together from the instrument’s speakers. Three convenient preset settings are provided for different vocal performance preferences and situations, and you can even make and save your own original microphone settings. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 11 Setting Up Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION Setting Up Read these cautions carefully before you assemble or use the keyboard stand. These cautions are to promote safe use of the stand and to prevent injury and damage from occurring to you and others. By following these cautions carefully, your keyboard stand will provide you with safe and prolonged use. • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Use the stand after assembly is complete. An uncompleted stand may overturn or the keyboard may drop. • Always place the stand on a flat, stable surface. Placing the stand on uneven surfaces may cause it to become unstable or overturn, the keyboard to drop, or injury. • Do not use the stand for anything other than its designed purpose. Placing other objects on the stand may result in the object dropping or the stand overturning. • Do not apply excessive force to the keyboard as it may cause the stand to overturn or the keyboard to drop. • Make sure the stand is sturdy and safe, and all screws have been tight and firm before use. If not, the stand may overturn, the keyboard may drop, or may result in injury to the user. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a phillips-head (+) screwdriver of the appropriate size ready. 1 The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the parts as needed. 1 Assembly Parts Back board L R Side boards Stand bases A (1 pc.) q Joint connectors B (1 pc.) C (2 pcs.) w Metal brackets (4 pcs.) r 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) 12 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual e 3 x 8 mm roundhead screws (12 pcs.) t 6 x 30 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) y 5 x 16 mm roundhead screws (4 pcs.) Keyboard Stand Assembly 2 w Metal bracket w Metal bracket w Metal bracket w Metal bracket (A) (B) Setting Up (C) (C) e 3 x 8 mm e 3 x 8 mm roundhead screws roundhead screws L R 3 q Joint connectors 2 Attach the metal brackets. Attach the metal brackets w to the top of the side boards, using the screws e as shown. 3 Attach the stand bases. Insert the joint connectors q into the side boards as shown. The joint connectors have been installed properly if you can see the screw head on the connector. NOTE • If you put the connectors in wrong direction and want to take them out, tap around the holes on the boards. Attach the “L” (Left) and “R” (Right) stand bases to the bottom of the side boards, using the screws r. “L” (Left) and “R” (Right) are marked on the upper surfaces of the stand bases. If you have trouble fastening the screws, use a screwdriver to rotate the joint connectors so that the connector holes are aligned with the screw holes on the stand bases. “L” “R” r 6 x 70 mm roundhead screws DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 13 Keyboard Stand Assembly 4 4 Setting Up t 6 x 30 mm roundhead screws Attach the back board. Attach the back board, using the screws t. Check the back-to-front orientation for the side boards. Make sure the non-colored surface is facing down. CAUTION • Be careful not to drop the back board or touch the sharp metal fittings. NOTE • If you have purchased a pedal unit (sold separately), attach the pedal unit before proceeding to the next step. Refer to the instructions provided with your pedal unit. • For information on the pedal functions, refer to page 22. 5 Be sure to place your hands at least 10 cm from either end of the keyboard when positioning it. 5 Put the keyboard on the stand. Check the back-to-front orientation for stand, and carefully place the keyboard on the side boards. Slowly move the keyboard so that the holes on the bottom of the keyboard are properly aligned with the holes on the angle brackets. CAUTION At least 10 cm • Be careful not to drop the keyboard or to get your fingers caught between the keyboard and the stand parts. • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the illustration. At least 10 cm 14 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Keyboard Stand Assembly 6 Install the keyboard to the stand. Fix the keyboard to the angle brackets, using the screws y. Setting Up 6 y 5 x 16 mm roundhead screws Post-assembly checklist Once you’ve assembled the stand, check the following points: • Are there any parts left over?  If so, read the assembly instructions again and correct any errors you might have made. • Is the instrument clear of doors and other movable fixtures?  If not, move the instrument to an appropriate location. • Does the instrument make a rattling noise when you play it or move it?  If so, properly tighten all screws. • Also, if the keyboard makes a creaking noise or seems unsteady when you play it, refer carefully to the assembly instructions and diagrams and retighten all screws. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 15 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel Song category list Style category list Setting Up e r t y q u w i o !0 !3 !1 !2 !4 Front Panel q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2 !3 16 [ ] (Standby/On) switch..................... page 18 [MASTER VOLUME] control ................ page 19 [DEMO/BGM] button .................... pages 38, 66 [SCORE] button....................................page 41 [LYRICS] button....................................page 41 [REC] button ........................... pages 44, 46, 49 LESSON START [WAITING] button..............................page 43 [YOUR TEMPO] button .....................page 43 [MINUS ONE] button.........................page 43 [SMART CHORD] button......................page 35 [MIC SETTING] button .........................page 69 Song Track [1]–[5], [A] buttons............................page 40 Lesson [R] and [L] buttons ...........................page 42 [METRONOME ON/OFF] button ..........page 29 [TEMPO/TAP] button.................... pages 63, 67 SONG/AUDIO [REPEAT&LEARN] button................page 43 [A-B REPEAT] button........................page 40 [REW] button.....................................page 40 [FF] button.........................................page 40 [PAUSE] button .................................page 40 [START/STOP] button .......................page 39 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual !4 STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button.................... page 32 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button ............. page 61 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button ................ page 61 [SYNC STOP] button ........................ page 62 [SYNC START] button....................... page 33 [START/STOP] button....................... page 33 !5 REGIST MEMORY [BANK], [1]–[4] buttons.................... page 50 !6 CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons ....... page 24 !7 [EXIT] button ........................................ page 23 !8 [EXECUTE] button ............................... page 82 !9 DATA ENTRY Dial, Number buttons [0]–[9], [+] and [-] buttons............................. page 24 @0 [FILE CONTROL] button...................... page 82 @1 [FUNCTION] button.............................. page 72 @2 [PIANO ROOM] button......................... page 25 @3 [SONG/AUDIO] button ......................... page 39 @4 [STYLE] button..................................... page 32 @5 [VOICE] button ..................................... page 27 @6 [MUSIC DATABASE] button................. page 33 @7 [SPLIT ON/OFF] button ....................... page 28 @8 [DUAL ON/OFF] button ........................ page 28 @9 [HARMONY ON/OFF] button ............... page 31 #0 [PITCH BEND] wheel ........................... page 56 #1 USB TO DEVICE terminal ...... pages 77, 80, 81 Panel Controls and Terminals Voice category list Music Database category list Setting Up Display (page 23) !9 !6 @0 #1 !7 !8 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 !5 @7 @8 @9 #0 A-1 C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 Rear Panel #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 $0 Rear Panel #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 CONTRAST knob .................................page 23 USB TO HOST terminal.......... pages 74, 76, 77 SUSTAIN jack .......................................page 21 PEDAL UNIT jack .................................page 22 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ........................page 20 AUX IN jack........................................... page 76 MIC VOLUME knob ..............................page 69 #9 MIC INPUT jack .................................... page 69 $0 DC IN jack ............................................. page 18 “Press & Hold” symbol By holding down one of the buttons having this symbol, you can call up an alternate function, other than the one called up when simply pressing. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 17 Setting Up Power Requirements Setting Up WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (page 91) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. 1 Connect the AC power adaptor to the DC IN jack. 2 Plug the AC power adaptor into an AC outlet. For the Power Adaptor with a Removable Plug Do not remove the plug from the power adaptor. If the plug is removed accidentally, slide the plug into place without touching the metallic parts, and then push the plug in completely until it clicks. Plug Slide the plug as indicated CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms, to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. * The shape of the plug differs depending on locale. WARNING • Make sure to keep the plug attached to the AC adaptor. Using the plug alone can cause electric shock or fire. • Never touch the metallic section when attaching the plug. To avoid electric shock, short circuit or damage, also be careful that there is no dust between the AC adaptor and plug. 1 2 AC power adaptor AC outlet Turning the Power On/Off Turn down the MASTER VOLUME control to “MIN” then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the MASTER VOLUME control. To turn off the power, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again for a second. CAUTION • When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet. 18 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Setting the Volume CAUTION Setting Up To adjust the volume level of the entire keyboard sound, use the MASTER VOLUME control located at the left of the panel. Play the keyboard to actually produce sound while you adjusting the volume to the desired level. • Do not use the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Intelligent Acoustic Control (IAC) IAC is a function which automatically adjusts and controls the sound quality according to the overall volume of the instrument. Even when the volume is low, it permits both low sounds and high sounds to be clearly heard. For details, refer to page 59. Auto Power Off Function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that will elapse before the power is automatically turned off is set by default to 30 minutes. To disable the Auto Power Off function: Turn off the power, then press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power while holding down the lowest key. Make sure to hold down lowest key until a message appears at the top left of the display after pressing the power switch. To set the time that elapses before Auto Power Off is executed: Press the [FUNCTION] button, press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button several times until “Auto Power Off” appears, then select the desired value by using the dial. Settings: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120 (min.) Default value: 30 min. NOTICE • The recorded Song will be lost if the power is automatically turned off without executing the save operation. Make sure to save your recorded Song before the power turns off. • Depending on the instrument status, the power may not turn off automatically, even after the elapse of the specified period of time. Always turn off the power manually when the instrument is not in use. • When the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time while connected to an external device such as an amplifier, speaker or computer, make sure to follow the instructions in the Owner’s Manual to turn off the power to the instrument and the connected devices, in order to protect the devices from damage. If you do not want the power to turn off automatically when a device is connected, disable Auto Power Off. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 19 Setting Up Connecting Headphones or External Audio Equipment (PHONES/OUTPUT Jack) Setting Up CAUTION • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the components, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss may occur. Headphones Any pair of stereo headphones with a standard stereo phone plug can be plugged in here for convenient monitoring. The speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. This setting can be changed so that speaker sound is always on regardless whether a plug is inserted or not (page 58). External Audio Equipment CAUTION • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. NOTICE • When the instrument’s sound is output to an external device, first turn on the power to the instrument, then to the external device. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. If the instrument’s power is automatically turned off via the Auto Power Off function (page 19), first turn off the external device, then turn on the power to the instrument then the external device again. NOTICE Standard stereo phone plug Standard stereo phone plug Audio cable The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. Optimum setting Output gain level for this jack is set to a value suitable for connecting headphones, as the default setting. You can switch this to the value suitable for connecting an external audio device. For details on how to switch the value, see page 58. 20 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual • Do not route the output from the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to the AUX IN jack. If you make this connection, the signal input at the AUX IN jack is output from the PHONES/OUTPUT jack. These connections could result in a feedback loop that will make normal performance impossible, and may even damage both pieces of equipment. NOTE • Use audio cables and adaptor cables having no (zero) resistance. Setting Up Connecting a Footswitch (SUSTAIN Jack) The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing a footswitch. Plug the supplied footswitch into this jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. An FC3A foot pedal or FC4A or FC5 footswitch (sold separately) can also be connected to this jack. The FC3A lets you use the Half Pedal function (page 22). Press the [FUNCTION] button, press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button repeatedly until “Assignable Pedal” appears, then select the desired setting by using the dial. SUSTAIN • Make sure that power is off when connecting or disconnecting a footswitch or a foot pedal. PORTAMENTO • The sustain function does not affect the Split Voice (page 28). Damper Resonance This function simulates the sustain sound produced with the damper pedal on a grand piano. If you want to use this function, select a voice in the “Target Voice List” below, then press the footswitch. This function can be turned off via the FUNCTION display (page 74). For information on how to select a Voice, see page 27. Voice Name 001 Natural! Grand Piano 003 Live! Pop Grand Piano 004 Live! Warm Grand Piano 008 Honky Tonk Piano 167 Natural Grand Piano (XG) 169 Live Pop Grand Piano (XG) 170 Live Warm Grand Piano (XG) 173 Honky Tonk Piano (XG) NOTE • This function does not affect the Voice 001 “Natural! Grand Piano” and 167 “Natural Grand Piano (XG)”, which would not sound appropriately with this function. • This affects only Main/Dual Voices and the Harmony sound (pages 27, 28 and 31), and has no effect on the Split Voices (page 28). MIC ON/OFF Turns the microphone sound on or off (page 71). START/STOP Same as the [START/STOP] button (pages 33, 39). TAP TEMPO When Style and Song are stopped, tapping the pedal at the desired tempo—four times for time signatures in 4 (4/4, etc.), and three times for time signatures in 3 (3/4, etc.) starts playback of the rhythm part of the Style or the Song at the tempo you tapped the pedal. During playback of a Style or Song, you can change the tempo by tapping the pedal twice at the desired tempo. Target Voice List Voice No. Allows you to use a pedal to control sustain. When you press and hold the pedal, all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento time can also be adjusted in the Function “Portamento Time” (page 74). NOTE • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. Setting Up Assigning specific functions to the pedal The function of the footswitch or the foot pedal connected to SUSTAIN jack can be changed from its default setting (Sustain). NOTE • This effect is applied only to a Voice in the “Target Voice List” selected as the Main Voice or used in Track 1 (page 68) of the Song. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 21 Setting Up Connecting a Pedal Unit (PEDAL UNIT jack) Setting Up This jack is for connecting an LP-7A/LP-7AWH pedal unit (sold separately). When connecting the pedal unit, make sure to also assemble the unit on the supplied keyboard stand. NOTE • Make sure that power is off when connecting or disconnecting the pedal unit. • This affects only Main/Dual Voices and Harmony sound (pages 27, 28 and 31). • The functions of the pedals of the pedal unit cannot be changed. Half Pedal function (for FC3A and LP-7A/LP-7AWH) This function allows you to vary the sustain length depending on how far the pedal is pressed. The farther you press the pedal, the more the sound sustains. For example, if you press the damper pedal and the notes you play sound a bit murky and loud with too much sustain, you can partially release the pedal to lessen the sustain (murkiness). LP-7A/7AWH (sold separately) Keyboard Stand Pedal Unit functions Damper Pedal (Right) Pressing this pedal will sustain notes longer. Releasing this pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. This pedal lets you use the Damper Resonance (page 21) and Half Pedal (see above) functions. When using both a footswitch and pedal unit, the last effect applied takes priority. Sostenuto Pedal (Center) If you play a note or notes on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a note or notes, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.” Soft Pedal (Left) The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. 22 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual If you press and hold the damper pedal here, all the notes shown will be sustained. If you press and hold the sostenuto pedal here, only the notes held at this timing will be sustained. MAIN Display Setting Up When the power is turned on, the MAIN display automatically appears. This display shows the basic settings of the instrument, including the current Voice, Style, Song, Audio and other settings. To Return to the MAIN Display You can return to the MAIN display from any other display by pressing the [EXIT] button. CONTRAST knob Adjust the CONTRAST knob on the rear panel of the instrument for optimum display legibility. A-B Repeat MIC Appears when MIC is set to ON (page 69). Appears when A-B Repeat (page 40) playback is engaged. Lesson part Shows the current Lesson part (page 42). Time Signature Measure Number Display Title Tempo Appears when the corresponding function is turned on. Page 54 Transpose Page 31 Voice Style Indicates the current Voices (Main, Dual and Split) (pages 27, 28). Indicates the current Style (page 32). Song or Audio Indicates the current Song or Audio file. Chord indication Smart Chord setting (page 35) M.D.B. Style Status Registration Memory Status Indicates the current M.D.B. (page 33). Song Track Status Appears when Auto Accompaniment (ACMP) is on. Shows the selected bank number. Appears when the Synchro Stop function is engaged. Shows the memory numbers that contain data. A border appears around the selected number. Shows section name Indicates the track status of the current Song (pages 40 and 46). Highlighted when ready for recording. Specified as Song recording target. Contains data and is muted. Contains no data. Contains data and can be played back. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 23 Basic Controls Before operating the instrument, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the basic controls below that are used to select items and change values. Setting Up  Dial Rotate the dial clockwise to increase the value, or counterclockwise to decrease the value. Decrease Increase  CATEGORY buttons Use these buttons to jump to the first Voice, Style, or Song in the next or previous Category, and call up the next or previous Function sequentially. Example: VOICE SELECT (MAIN) display Current category  Number buttons Use the Number buttons to directly enter a number or parameter value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes (such as “003”), the first zeroes can be omitted. However, completely entering [0][0][3] will display “003” quicker than pressing only [3]. Example: Selecting Voice 003 Previous category Press number buttons [0], [0], [3].  [-] and [+] buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. To restore the value to the default setting, press both buttons simultaneously. Press briefly to decrease. 24 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Press briefly to increase. Next category In most procedures described throughout this owner’s manual the dial is recommended for selection simply because it is the easiest and most intuitive selection method. Please note however, that most items or values that can be selected using the dial can also be selected using the [+] and [-] buttons. Enjoying Piano Performance (Piano Room) Basic Guide The Piano Room function is for those who want to simply, conveniently, and fully enjoy playing the instrument as a piano. No matter what settings you’ve made from the panel, you can instantly call up the optimum settings for piano performance with a single button press. You can also change the piano settings as you desire, or record your performance in the Piano Room as an audio file. 1 Press the [PIANO ROOM] button to call up the Piano Room display. MAIN display Button Function Description [1] For selecting the environment (Reverb Type). • CONCERT (Concert Hall) ENVIRONMENT* • RECITAL (Recital Hall) • STAGE • ROOM • OFF [2] PIANO* For selecting the desired Piano type. • GRAND (Grand Piano) • POP (Pop Grand) • WARM (Warm Grand) • H. TONK (Honky Tonk) [3] LID POS.* (Lid Position) Determines how much the Lid is opened. This cannot be set when “Honky Tonk” is selected. [4] DETAIL For calling up the detailed setting display. Basic Guide Playing a Piano Performance in the Piano Room Detail setting display Button This operation calls up the panel settings for piano performance. All other functions except for the relevant buttons ([BANK], REGIST MEMORY [1]–[4], CATEGORY [r]/[f], [EXIT], [EXECUTE], [+] (YES), [-] (NO), [METRONOME ON/OFF], [TEMPO/TAP] buttons), the dial, the pedal, the PITCH BEND wheel and master volume setting are disabled. 2 Use the [BANK] and REGIST MEMORY [1]–[4] buttons to set the desired piano settings. To call up the DETAIL display, press the REGIST MEMORY [4] button. You can change the display by pressing the REGIST MEMORY [4] button repeatedly. (MAIN  DETAIL  RECORD  MAIN) NOTE • You can change the settings also by using the dial, CATEGORY [r]/[f], [+] (YES)/[-] (NO) buttons. Function Description [BANK] TOUCH* For selecting the Touch Response sensitivity (page 57). • SOFT • MEDIUM • HARD [1] TUNE* Determines the pitch of this instrument in 1Hz steps. Setting range: 416Hz–466Hz [2] D. RESO.* (Damper Resonance) Determines whether Damper Resonance is applied (ON) or not (OFF). [3] RESET Restores all settings of Piano Room to the default. After a message appears, press the [+] (YES) button to restore all settings. [4] RECORD For calling up the recording display (page 26). * The settings marked with * (asterisk) will be maintained even if you exit from this display or turn off the power. Pressing the [PIANO ROOM] button next time will call up the previously entered Piano settings. 3 Play the keyboard. NOTE • You can turn the Metronome on or off by pressing the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button. For information on setting the Metronome tempo and time signature, refer to page 29. 4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Piano Room display. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 25 Enjoying Piano Performance (Piano Room) NOTE Recording your Performance as Audio in the Piano Room You can record your performance in the Piano Room to a USB flash drive as an audio file. 1 Connect the USB flash drive to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on page 80. • A moving series of dots (…) appear in the display when recording setup takes a long time. If this happens, wait to play the keyboard until the dots are gone and the  STOP button in the display flashes. 5 After you finish the performance, press the REGIST MEMORY [1] button to stop recording. The Audio file will automatically be saved as “UserAudioxxx” (xxx is 001–100) to the USB flash drive. The file name is shown on the display. File name NOTICE Basic Guide • Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn the power off during recording. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash drive data or the recording data. 2 Press the [PIANO ROOM] button to call up the Piano Room display. Make settings as desired, such as Piano type, environment, lid position and so on. 3 Press the REGIST MEMORY [4] button once or twice to call up the “RECORD” display. NOTE • After recording is stopped, a moving series of dots (…) appear, indicating that saving is in progress. NOTE • You can change the display by pressing the REGIST MEMORY [4] button repeatedly. (MAIN  DETAIL  RECORD  MAIN) 4 Press the REGIST MEMORY [1] button to start recording, then play the keyboard. “RECORD” display 6 To hear the recorded performance, press the REGIST MEMORY [2] button. Press the REGIST MEMORY [2] button again to stop the playback. 7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Piano Room display. Playing back audio files recorded in the Piano Room In the Piano Room, you can play back only the latest recorded audio file; other audio files recorded in the Piano Room can only be played back after exiting from the Piano Room. For information on playing back the Audio files, refer to “Playing Back a Song or Audio File” on page 39. 26 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices In addition to the wonderfully realistic piano sounds, you can select and play other musical instrument Voices, such as organ, guitar, bass, strings, sax, trumpet, drums and percussion, and even sound effects. Selecting a Main Voice 3 Play the keyboard. This procedure selects the Main Voice for playing on the keyboard. Press the [VOICE] button to call up the Main Voice selection display. The current Voice number and name will be highlighted. Preset Voice Types 001–151 167–554 Instrument Voices 152–166 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys. Details on assigning instruments to keys are provided in the Drum Kit List of the separate Data List. 000 One Touch Setting (OTS) The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. Basic Guide 1 Playing the “Grand Piano” (Piano Reset) Current Voice number and name 2 When you want to reset various settings to default and simply play a Piano sound, hold down the [PIANO ROOM] button for longer than a second. Use the dial to select the desired Voice. The Voice List is provided on the front panel, or in the separate Data List. Hold for longer than a second. Select 023 Cool! Organ After a confirmation message appears on the display, press the [+] (YES) button to call up the default piano settings. The Voice number is set to 001 “Natural! Grand Piano” and all other settings are turned off automatically, so only the Grand Piano Voice will play over the entire keyboard. NOTE • Keep in mind that this Piano Reset function is different from the Piano Room feature (page 25), even though the button is the same. • This function cannot be used while the Piano Room display (pages 25, 26) is shown. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 27 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Layering Two Voices—Dual Voice In addition to the Main Voice, you can layer a different Voice over the entire keyboard as a “Dual Voice.” 1 Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button to turn Dual on. Playing a Split Voice in the Left Hand area By dividing the keyboard into two separate areas, you can play one Voice with your right hand and a different Voice with your left. 1 Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button to turn on Split. The keyboard is divided into the left hand and right hand areas. Basic Guide Split point Two voices will sound at the same time. You can confirm whether the Dual function is on in the MAIN display. Split Voice Main Voice and Dual Voice You can play a “Split Voice” on the left hand area of the keyboard while playing a Main Voice and Dual Voice on the right hand area of the keyboard. The highest key for the left hand area is referred to as the “Split Point” which can be changed from the default F#2 key. For details, refer to page 64. You can confirm whether the Split function is on in the MAIN display. Dual Voice number and name appear when Dual is on. 2 Press the [DUAL ON/OFF] button again to exit from Dual. Although turning on Dual will select a Dual Voice suitable for the current Main Voice, you can easily select a different Dual Voice (page 60). Split Voice number and name appear when Split is on. 2 28 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Press the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button again to exit from Split. You can easily select a different Split Voice (page 60). Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Setting the Time Signature The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo), convenient for practicing. 1 Press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button to start the metronome. Here, we’ll set a time signature of 3/4 as an example. NOTE • The setting of the time signature cannot be changed in the Piano Room. Set it before calling up the Piano Room display. 1 Current setting Hold for longer than a second. Indicates the beat number in the measure. 2 Hold down the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to call up “Time Signature - Numerator.” The time signature is shown on the display. Numerator (Number of beats per measure) Press the [METRONOME ON/OFF] button again to stop the metronome. Adjusting the Metronome Tempo Denominator (The length of one beat) NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a Style or Song that is selected, so these parameters cannot be changed while a Style or Song is playing. Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo value, then use the dial to adjust the Tempo value. Tempo Basic Guide Using the Metronome 2 Rotate the dial to select “3.” A bell will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. 3 Press the CATEGORY [f] button to call up “Time Signature - Denominator.” Press the [EXIT] button to exit the TEMPO display. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 29 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 4 Rotate the dial to select “4.” Setting the Bell sound This allows you to select whether the click sound has a bell accent, or plays only a click sound. 5 Confirm the setting by playing the Metronome. Basic Guide 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button repeatedly to select “Bell.” 3 Rotate the dial to turn the bell sound on or off. Setting the Metronome Volume 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons repeatedly to select “Metronome Volume.” Metronome volume 3 30 Rotate the dial to set the Metronome Volume. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adding Harmony How to sound each Harmony Type You can add harmony notes to the Main Voice. 1 Harmony type 01 to 10, 13 Press the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button to turn Harmony on. Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when the Auto Accompaniment is on (page 32). Harmony type 11 (1+5) and 12 (Octave) Play the keys. Appears when Harmony is turned on. Although turning on the Harmony will select a Harmony Type suitable for the current Main Voice, you can select a different Harmony Type. Basic Guide Harmony type 14 (Multi Assign) Both of the Main and Dual Voices should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect. The Main and Dual Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play them. Harmony type 15 to 18 (Echo) Play the keys. 2 Hold down the [HARMONY ON/OFF] button for longer than a second until “Harmony Type” appears on the display. Harmony type 19 to 22 (Tremolo) Keep holding down the keys. Harmony type 23 to 26 (Trill) Hold for longer than a second. Hold down two keys. You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 74). Current Harmony Type 3 Rotate the dial to select the desired Harmony Type. For details, refer to the separate Data List. The effect and operation differs depending on the Harmony Type. Refer to the section below. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 31 Playing Styles The instrument features a variety of accompaniment and rhythmic backing patterns (called “Styles”) in a variety of different musical genres including pop, jazz, and many others. Each Style features Auto Accompaniment, letting you produce automatic accompaniment playback simply by playing “chords” with your left hand. This lets you automatically recreate the sound of a full band or orchestra — even if you’re playing by yourself. 1 Press the [STYLE] button to call up the STYLE selection display. The current Style number and name is highlighted. 3 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment. Basic Guide When this is on, the functions printed below the buttons are available. Currently selected Style 2 4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display, then confirm whether the Auto Accompaniment is on. Use the dial to select the desired Style. The Style List is provided on the front panel, or in the separate Data List. ACMP appears when Auto Accompaniment is on. NOTE • You can also play the Styles in the instrument’s flash memory area transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 8) or loaded from a USB flash drive (page 86), and Styles on a USB flash drive connected to the instrument. These styles are numbered from 206 upward. Playing only the Rhythm Part Pressing the [START/STOP] button starts playback of only the rhythm part. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button again. Keep in mind that some Styles, such as “PIANIST” category Styles, have no rhythm part. These Styles produce no sound even if you press the [START/ STOP] button. When you want to use any of these Styles, always execute step 3 and later so that all accompaniment parts will sound. 32 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual When the Auto Accompaniment is on, the keyboard area left to the Split Point (54: F#2) becomes the “Auto Accompaniment range” and is used only for specifying the chords. Split point (F#2) Auto Accompaniment range NOTE • The Split Point can be specified from the FUNCTION display. For details, refer to page 64. Playing Styles 5 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. You can add intro, ending and rhythm variations to Style playback by using “Sections.” For details, refer to page 61. Flashes when Synchro Start is on. Using the Music Database Play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment range to start Style playback. Play a melody with your right hand and chords with your left. 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button to call up the Music Database selection display. Basic Guide 6 If you have difficulty finding and selecting the desired Style and Voice, use this feature. From the Music Database, simply selecting your favorite music genre calls up the ideal settings. Split point Auto Accompaniment range Chord indication Chords being played in the Auto Accompaniment range will appear. Music Database name Both the Auto Accompaniment and Synchro Start are automatically turned on. 2 Use the dial to select the desired Music Database. This operation calls up the panel settings such as Voice and Style that are registered to the selected Music Database. The Music Database List is provided in the separate Data List. 3 Play the keyboard as described in Steps 6 to 7 in this page. For information about chords, refer to “Chords” (page 34) or use the Chord Dictionary function (page 65). You can adjust the volume of the Style playback. For details, see page 63. 7 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 33 Playing Styles Chords For users who are unfamiliar with chords, this chart shows the notes of common chords. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details.  indicates the root note. Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh Basic Guide C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 • A wide variety of chord types can be recognized as well as the above chord types. • Depending on the chord type, inversions can be used as well as in “root” position. • Some chord types may not be recognized if some notes are omitted. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For a root of “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Changing the Chord Fingering type There are three different Chord Fingering Types. For details, refer to page 64. 34 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). Playing Styles Using the Smart Chord feature If you want to fully enjoy playing in various Styles but don’t know how to play the appropriate chords, Smart Chord is very useful. This function lets you control Styles with just a single finger as long as you know the key of your playing music, even if you don’t know any chord fingering such as major, minor, diminished and so on. Appropriate chords suited for the music genre will sound whenever you press a single note, as if you were playing the “right” chords. F Chord Types F#dim 1 Select the Style which you want to play with, as described in steps 1–2 on page 32. 2 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Press the [SMART CHORD] button to turn on the Smart Chord function. Gm 5 C7 F C7 On the KEY SIGNATURE page, use the dial to select the Key Signature. Make sure to select the Key Signature which is same as that on your music score, or your desired key for playing. Check the Key Signature indication at the right bottom corner of the display. Basic Guide Key Signature (Key in F major) Indicates the selected Key Signature. Set this to the same as your music score. Indicates the current Smart Chord settings, KEY and TYPE when the Smart Chord is on. NOTE • Smart Chord can be turned on after pressing the [STYLE] button. 4 Hold down the [SMART CHORD] button until the SMART CHORD setting display appears. Since the number of flats or sharps is shown to the right of Key Signature in the display, you can also find the desired Key Signature by counting the number of flats or sharps. Hold for longer than a second. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 35 Playing Styles TYPE Page: This page provides five Types of music genres which determine the specific chord assignment for each scale note in the Auto Accompaniment range. Although selecting a Style in step 1 will automatically set the optimum Type, you can select a different Type here for more appropriate results, if necessary. To do so, from the SMART CHORD display press the CATEGORY [f] button to select the TYPE page then use the dial to select a Type. The actual chord assignments are provided in the Smart Chord Chart in the separate Data List. 7 According to the music score or the chord progression of your performance, play only the root key with the left hand. Pressing a key will start playback of the Style. You can try the chord progression F - F# - G - C - F - C in order referring to the score on page 35. Split point Auto Accompaniment range Basic Guide A sample score for the Smart Chord function is provided in the separate Data List. Keyboard Voice No.001 Natural! Grand Piano Style No.184 Learning 4-4 Key Signature F Major (b* 1) Type Standard F &b c œ C7 œ œ J œ. C7 5 & b œ. F 9 &b œ. œ œ J œ œ J F 13 &b NOTE 36 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual b œ J œ 21 &b 8 œ. ˙ ˙ œ ˙ ˙˙ b œ œ J ˙ j œ œ œ œ œ. F dim7 C 7/G œ œ. j œ œ Dm C C7 œ C7 ˙. œ w F ˙˙ ˙˙ .. C7 F œ œ œ œ F ˙˙ œ œ F G m7 # œ ˙. F dim7 ˙˙ œ F œ œ F œ œ. ˙. œ j œ œ œ # F j œ œ œ. œ # C dim7 B œ C7 F & b ww F œ F œ F • The root of a chord shown at the bottom left of the display during Song recording may be different when the recorded Song is played back. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. œ 17 • Each music type assumes only typical or conventional chord progression for the Style. 6 œ. B C7 ˙ F b B Indicates the chord you play F œ œ œ w Press the [SMART CHORD] button to turn off the Smart Chord function. Playing Styles Calling up Optimum Styles for Your Performance (Style Recommender) Example 2: Play the following rhythm in the special Drum section of the keyboard. Snare This convenient function “recommends” optimum Styles for your performance, based on the rhythm you play for one or two measures. 8-beat Styles or those of a similar feel may be listed on the display. Hold down the [STYLE] button for longer than a second to call up the STYLE RECOMMENDER display. The keyboard is divided by the B0 key into two sections (Drum and Piano) as shown below. The timing at which you play the keys is analyzed over several seconds, then playback of the most recommended Style starts. In addition, the candidates of the other recommended Styles are listed in the display. Basic Guide 1 Kick Hold for longer than a second. B0 The Drum instruments (Kick, Snare and Hi-Hat) are assigned to the left-side section while the Piano sound is assigned to the right. 2 Search for the desired Style. 2-1 Press the [START/STOP] button to start the metronome. A “WAITING” indication appears in the display. As necessary, use the [+]/[-] buttons to select the beat, and use the [TEMPO/TAP] button to adjust the tempo (page 63). NOTE • Only the note-on timing is analyzed. Tempo, pitches and note length are ignored. • The recommended Style plays back according to the last chord played in the PIANO section. The PIANO section detects chords using the Fingering Chord type “FullKeyboard” (page 64). 3 Listen to the highest recommended Style, while playing chords in the PIANO section (as shown in step 1). You can try out other Styles listed on the display by using the dial. If you cannot find the desired Style in the list, press the [STYLE] button, then return to step 2-2. 4 When you’ve found a Style you’re satisfied with, press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Style Recommender display. 5 Play the keyboard along with the Style you just found. 2-2 While “WAITING” is shown, play the rhythm you have in mind on the Drum or Piano section for one or two measures along with the metronome. Below are two possible examples. Example 1: Play the following rhythm in the Piano section of the keyboard. Bossa Nova Styles or those of a similar feel may be listed on the display. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 37 Playing Songs and Audio Files There are two kinds of data that can be recorded and played back on this instrument: Songs and Audio files. Not only can you play back a Song or Audio file and listen to it, but you can also play the keyboard along with Song or Audio file playback. • Songs The Songs are organized by category as listed below, allowing you to easily select from the desired category. The numbers 001–100 are Preset Songs, and a complete list is provided in the separate Data List. The numbers 101– 105 are Songs you’ve recorded on this instrument, and numbers from 106 upward are MIDI files in SMF (Standard MIDI File) format in this instrument’s flash memory and a USB flash drive connected to this instrument.  Gives you an idea of the advanced capabilities of this instrument.  Demonstrates many useful Voices of this instrument.  These are piano solo pieces.  These are piano ensemble pieces.  When you need to practice backing (accompaniment) patterns, these songs are ideal for that purpose. Basic Guide  Includes famous classical music pieces.  Includes traditional songs from around the world.  Songs you’ve recorded on this instrument (page 44).  Songs (MIDI files) in the instrument’s flash memory area transferred from a computer (refer to “Computer-related Operations”—page 8) or loaded from a USB flash drive (page 86), and Songs (MIDI files) on a USB flash drive connected to the instrument. NOTE • Score data for the Preset Songs (exceptions are the Over View Demo Song and Songs 1–11) are provided in the Songbook, which is available as a free download from the website (page 8). • Audio files Commercially available Audio files in WAV format (file extension: .wav with 44.1 kHz sample rate, 16 bit resolution, stereo) and your own recorded Audio files on a USB flash drive can be played back (page 49). Availability of functions differs between Songs and Audio files. In this manual, the following icons indicate whether or not the explanation applies to Songs or Audio files individually. Example: … Indicates explanation applies only to Songs. AUDIO SONG Listening to the Overview Demo This is a special demo for sound demonstrations and features. Press the [DEMO/BGM] button to start playback of the Overview Demo continuously, calling up the various displays in sequence. 38 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual To stop playback, press the [DEMO/BGM] button or [START/STOP] button. Please note that any Song-related functions with “ SONG ” cannot be applied to Overview Demo. NOTE • With the default setting, only one Demo is played back and repeated when the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed. This setting can be changed so that all Preset Songs are played, or all Songs and Audio files on a USB flash drive are played. Five playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs (page 66). Playing Songs and Audio Files Playing Back a Song or Audio File SONG SELECT display AUDIO SONG Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on page 80. If you want to play back a Song or Audio file on a USB flash drive, connect a USB flash drive to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Audio files must be on a USB flash drive. AUDIO SELECT display Basic Guide 1 Important • In order to play a file on a USB flash drive, the file must be stored either in the USB flash drive’s root directory or a first-level/ second-level folder in the root directory. Files stored in third-level-folders created inside a second-level folder cannot be selected and played by this instrument. USB flash drive (Root) File File Can be selected/ played File File 2 3 Use the dial to select the desired Song or Audio file. When selecting Songs, refer to the list on page 38. 4 Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button again. Cannot be selected/ played Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button once or twice to call up the SONG SELECT display for Song selecting, or AUDIO SELECT display for Audio selecting. The available Songs or Audio files are listed on the display. If a USB flash drive is connected, pressing the [SONG/AUDIO] button repeatedly toggles between two displays: SONG SELECT and AUDIO SELECT. If a USB flash drive is not connected, this operation calls up only SONG SELECT display. When this is on, the functions printed above the buttons are available. You can adjust the Song volume (page 67) and Audio volume (page 67). Adjusting the Tempo of a Song Same procedure as with Style tempo. See page 63. NOTE • The tempo of audio playback cannot be changed. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 39 Playing Songs and Audio Files Fast Forward, Rewind, and Pause 3 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the end point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button again to set the B point. The specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly. 4 To cancel repeat playback, press the [AB REPEAT] button. To stop playback, press the [START/STOP] button. AUDIO SONG This instrument lets you fast forward [FF], rewind [REW] and pause [PAUSE] playback of the Song or Audio file. When this is on, the functions printed above the buttons are available. NOTE • If you want to set the start point “A” at the top of the Song, press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback. Basic Guide Pressing the [REW] or [FF] button once moves one measure backward/forward for Songs, or one second for Audio files. Holding one of them scrolls backward/forward continuously. Press the [PAUSE] button to pause playback, and press again to start from that point. A-B Repeat Turning Each Track On/Off SONG AUDIO Each “track” of a Song plays a different part—melody, percussion, accompaniment, etc. Each of the tracks can be muted so that you can play the muted part yourself. Pressing the desired Track button repeatedly will toggle the on/off status. AUDIO SONG You can specify a desired section of a Song and repeatedly play back that section by setting the A point (start point) and B point (end point). A Track will play back. B Track contains no data. 1 Start playback of the Song (page 39). 2 When playback reaches to the point you want to specify as the start point, press the [A-B REPEAT] button to set the A point. 40 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Track is muted. NOTE • Up to two Track buttons can be pressed simultaneously for turning on or off. Playing Songs and Audio Files SONG Displaying the Lyrics AUDIO SONG AUDIO You can view the music notation (score) of the selected Song. When the selected Song contains lyric data, you can view it on the instrument’s display during playback. 1 Select a Song (steps 1–3 on page 39). 1 2 Press the [SCORE] button to call up the Score display. Pressing this button each time alternates the displayed notation style between single-staff and double-staff. Select Song 38 (steps 1–3 on page 39), which is the only internal Song that provides lyric display. 2 Press the [LYRICS] button to call up the Lyrics display. The title, lyricist, and composer of the Song will appear on the display. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button. The Song will play back while the lyrics and chords are shown on the display. The lyrics will be highlighted to show the current location in the Song. Chord Marker Basic Guide Displaying the Song Score Lyrics Both chords and lyrics will be shown in singlestaff score display of a Song that includes chords and lyric data. 3 Press the [START/STOP] button to start Song playback. The marker moves to indicate the current position. If the Song parts are muted at this point you will be able to hear only the sound of your own performance so that you can play the Song yourself while reading the score. Refer to page 40 for more information on Song muting. NOTE • Commercially available Song files, including XF format files (page 10), are compatible with the Lyrics display features as long as they are standard MIDI file format files containing lyric data. Lyrics display may not be possible with some files. NOTE • When there are many lyrics, they may be displayed in two rows a measure, and/or some lyrics or chords may be abbreviated. • Small notes that are hard to read may be easier to read after you use the Quantize function (page 75). • No chords or lyrics are shown on the double-staff display. 4 4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 41 Using the Song Lesson Feature You can use the selected Song for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Try practicing with these three Song Lesson types. Three Types of Song Lesson Lesson 1—Waiting Practicing with Song Lesson 1 In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note. Select the desired Song for your lesson (page 39). NOTE • Audio files cannot be used with the Lesson features. NOTE • The Song Lesson features can be applied also to User Songs and Songs (SMF format 0 and 1) on a USB flash drive or transferred/loaded to the instrument (pages 84 and 86). Basic Guide 2 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [R/1] button for a right-hand lesson, [L/ 2] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R/1] and [L/2] buttons simultaneously for a bothhands lesson. The currently selected part is shown in the upper right corner of the display. Lesson 2—Your Tempo In this Lesson, try playing the correct notes shown on the display with the correct timing. The Song playback tempo will change to match the speed at which you are playing at. Lesson 3—Minus One Here’s where you can perfect your technique. The Song will play at the normal tempo, minus the part you have chosen to play. Play along while listening to the Song. 42 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual : Right-hand lesson : Left-hand lesson : Both-hands lesson Using the Song Lesson Feature 4 Press the desired LESSON START button, [WAITING], [YOUR TEMPO] or [MINUS ONE] to start playback of the Song Lesson. Play the notes shown in the on-screen score. The score marker and keyboard marker in the display will indicate the notes to play. 5 When Lesson playback reaches the end, check your evaluation Grade on the display. Your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. After the evaluation display has appeared, the lesson will start again from the beginning. NOTE Basic Guide • The evaluation feature can be turned off via the FUNCTION “Grade” item (page 75).  Marker Making Practice Perfect— Repeat & Learn  Marker Over indicator NOTE • The notes in the on-screen score may be shown an octave higher or lower (or more) depending on the Voice used in the Song. • Since the display has restrictions, the on-screen score may appear somewhat different from commercially available scores. When using the Lesson function, also make sure to refer to the notes shown in the on-screen keyboard at the bottom of the display. You can adjust the score appearance on the Lesson display by changing the Quantize parameter in the Score category in the Function List (page 75). Shifting the on-screen keyboard left or right. If the Over indicator appears, the hidden ( ) areas of the keyboard can be brought into view by pressing the [+] or [-] button. Notes that actually fall outside the keyboard’s range cannot be used in the lesson. The displayed range (61 keys) If you want to practice a specific section in which you made a mistake or you have difficulty with use the Repeat & Learn function. Press the [REPEAT & LEARN] button during Lesson playback. The Song location will move back four measures, a one-measure count will play, then Song playback will start again. Playback of the four measures will repeat with a one-measure count-in. To exit from this status, press this button again. NOTE • You can change the amount of measures the Repeat & Learn function jumps back by pressing a number button [1] to [9] during repeat playback. Actual keyboard range (88 keys) To stop Lesson playback, press the [START/ STOP] button. Even during playback, you can change the Lesson number by pressing the [WAITING], [YOUR TEMPO] or [MINUS ONE] button. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 43 Recording Your Performance This instrument allows you to record your performance in the following two methods. • Song recording (MIDI recording) With this method, recorded performances are saved to the instrument as a User Song, in SMF (format 0) MIDI file. If you want to re-record a specific section or edit parameters such as Voice, use this method. Also if you want to record your performance to each track one by one, execute “Recording to a Specified Track” of the Song recording method. Since a User Song can be converted to an Audio file after recording (page 85), you may want to use Song recording (with individual track recording) to first create a complex arrangement you would not otherwise be able to play live, then convert it to an Audio file. Up to approximately 30,000 notes can be recorded for one User Song. • Audio recording (page 49) Basic Guide With this method, recorded performances are saved to a USB flash drive as an Audio file. Recording is done without designating the recorded part. Since it is saved in stereo WAV format of normal CD quality resolution (44.1kHz/16bit) by default, it can be transmitted to and played on portable music players by using a computer. This instrument allows you to record up to 80 minutes per single recording. Song Recording SONG If you want to record with a Style, press the [STYLE] button then the [ACMP ON/ OFF] button to turn ACMP on. Once you have set the ACMP to ON, don’t call up the SONG SELECT or AUDIO SELECT display because doing so will set the ACMP to OFF. 3 Press the [REC] button to enable recording. If a User Song was not selected beforehand, this operation selects the lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (from 101–105) as the Recording target. AUDIO You can record up to five of your performances and save them as User Song 101 through 105. This operation is for recording a new Song from scratch. If you want to re-record a specific track, execute “Recording to a Specified Track” on page 46. NOTE • Split Voice, Metronome, the AUX IN sound and MIC INPUT sound cannot be recorded. 1 2 Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button once or twice to call up the SONG SELECT display for Song recording. Track 1 (and A) is automatically selected for recording. If a USB flash drive is connected, pressing the [SONG/AUDIO] button repeatedly toggles between two displays: SONG SELECT and AUDIO SELECT. If a USB flash drive is not connected, this operation calls up only SONG SELECT display. You can select the desired User Song with the dial. 44 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual To cancel recording, press the [REC] button or [EXIT] button. NOTICE • If all User Songs (Song numbers 101–105) contain recorded data, Song 101 will automatically be selected. In this case, you will record over and erase any previous data of this Song. Recording Your Performance NOTE • You can use the Metronome while recording although the metronome sound will not be recorded. After pressing the [REC] button, set the Time Signature and start Metronome before going on to step 4. 4 6 Press the [+] (YES) button to save the Song. The Song will be stored as a MIDI file to Song number 101–105. To cancel saving, press the [-] (NO) button at the prompt. Play the keyboard to start recording. You can also start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. NOTICE 7 Basic Guide The current measure will be shown on the display during recording. • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Now Writing…” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. To hear the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • If you press the [-] (NO) button once in response to the confirmation message, you have the option of saving the Song later until the power is turned off or another Song is selected. To do this hold down the [REC] button until the save confirmation message appears, then press the [+] (YES) button. Current measure 5 After you finish performance, press the [START/STOP] button or [REC] button to stop recording. When recording is stopped, a message asking if you want to save the Song will appear. or Data that cannot be recorded to Songs AUX IN sound, Microphone sound, Metronome sound, Damper Resonance effect, Split Voice, Damper Resonance ON/OFF, Master EQ Type, Output Gain, I.A.Control, I.A.Control Depth, MDB, Song Volume, Transpose, Tuning, Split Point Data that cannot be changed during the Song recording Style Number, ACMP ON/OFF, Smart Chord setting, Style Volume, Chord Fingering, Touch Response, Time Signature NOTICE • The recorded Song will be lost if you turn the power off without executing the save operation. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 45 Recording Your Performance Recording to a Specified Track SONG AUDIO Basic Guide With Song Recording, you can create a Song consisting of six tracks (1–5 and A) by recording your performance to each track one by one. In recording a piano piece, for example, you can record the righthand part to Track 1 then record the left-hand part to Track 2, allowing you create a complete piece which may be difficult to play live with both hands together. To record a performance with Style playback, for example, record the Style playback to Track A, then record melodies to Track 1 while listening to the already recorded Style playback. In this way, you can create an entire Song which would otherwise be difficult, or even impossible, to play live. Press and hold To record your keyboard performance, specify from [1] to [5]. (To record the Dual Voice specify from [1] to [3].) To record the Style playback, specify [A]. (ACMP is automatically turned on.) The selected track will be highlighted in the display. (When Track 1 is specified) Track 1 will be highlighted Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Style Track (When Track A is specified) Tracks [1]–[5] For recording your keyboard performances, such as a piano piece. Track [A] For recording Style playback. NOTE • Split Voice, Metronome, AUX IN sound and MIC INPUT sound cannot be recorded. Before recording, make the necessary settings such as Voice/Style selection. Track A will be highlighted When Track A is specified, you can specify one more track from [1]–[5] by repeating this step, and vice versa. To cancel recording, press the [REC] button or [EXIT] button. NOTICE 1 2 46 If you want to re-record an existing User Song, select the desired User Song. (Execute step 1 on page 44 then select the User Song from 101–105 using the dial.) If you want to record from scratch, select the unrecorded User Song. To specify the target track, while holding down the [REC] button, press one track button from [1]–[5] or [A]. To cancel recording to a specified track, press that track button again. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual • If you record to a track that contains previously recorded data, the previous data will be overwritten and lost. NOTE • If Auto Accompaniment is on and Track [A] has not yet been recorded, Track [A] will automatically be selected for recording when one of Tracks ([1]–[5]) is selected. If you only want to record to Track [1]–[5], be sure to turn Track [A] off. • If the User Song selected in step 1 already contains recorded Style data, the same Style number is automatically set. If you want to select another Style, press the [STYLE] button then use the dial to select the desired Style after specifying the [A] track. NOTE • You can use the Metronome while recording although the metronome sound will not be recorded. After pressing the [REC] button, set the Time Signature and start Metronome before going on to step 3. Recording Your Performance Play the keyboard to start Recording. 4 After you finish the performance, press the [START/STOP] button or [REC] button to stop recording. When recording is stopped, a message asking if you want to save the Song appears. or 7 Record your performance to another track by repeating steps 2–6. In step 2, select a track which has no recorded data. Play the keyboard while listening to the already recorded data. You can record to each track [1]–[5] using different Voices. Before specifying the target track, press the [VOICE] button and select the desired Voice, then press the [EXIT] button. NOTE • When recording another track, you can turn already recorded tracks on or off using the track buttons. See page 45 for information on data that cannot be recorded to the Songs or cannot be changed during Song recording. Basic Guide 3 NOTICE • The recorded performance will be lost if you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. 5 Press the [+] (YES) button to save the Song. The Song will be stored as a MIDI file to Song number 101–105. To cancel saving, press the [-] (NO) button at the prompt. The recorded track numbers in the display will be shown in a box border. NOTICE • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Now Writing…” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory and result in a loss of data. 6 To hear the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 47 Recording Your Performance Clearing a User Song SONG Clearing a Specified Track from a User Song AUDIO SONG You can clear all tracks of a User Song. 1 2 Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button, and then select the User Song (101 to 105) to be cleared. Basic Guide While holding down the track [A] button, press the track [1] button for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. To cancel this operation, press the [-] (NO) button. Hold for longer than a second. 3 48 This lets you clear individual tracks from a User Song. 1 Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button, and then select the desired User Song (101 to 105). 2 From [1] to [5] and [A], press the Track button to be cleared for longer than a second. A confirmation message will appear on the display. To cancel this operation, press the [-] (NO) button. Press and hold Press the [+] (YES) button to clear the Song. A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual AUDIO Hold for longer than a second. 3 Press the [+] (YES) button to clear the track. A clear-in-progress message will appear briefly on the display. Recording Your Performance 4 Audio Recording SONG Press the [REC] button to be ready for recording. AUDIO Before recording, make the necessary settings such as Voice/Style selection and the AUX IN and MIC INPUT connections (if you want to record with the input sound via AUX IN and MIC INPUT jacks). All the sound produced via this instrument other than Metronome can be recorded. If you want to cancel recording, press the [REC] button again or [EXIT] button. NOTICE 1 Connect the USB flash drive to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Before using a USB flash drive, be sure to read “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on page 80. 2 Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button once or twice to call up the AUDIO SELECT display for Audio recording. If a User Audio file was not selected beforehand, this operation selects a new Audio file as recording target. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button to start recording, then play the keyboard. Basic Guide • Don’t use the file name “_DGX-660_TMP.wav” in the USB flash drive because the file with the name will be overwritten and erased by newly recording Audio data. The elapsed recording time is shown in the MAIN display while recording. NOTICE • Never attempt to disconnect the USB flash drive or turn the power off during recording. Doing so may corrupt the USB flash drive data or the recording data. 6 After you finish the performance, press the [EXECUTE] button or [REC] button to stop recording. The Audio file will automatically be saved as “UserAudioxxx” (xxx is 001–100) in a folder labeled “USER FILES” which will automatically be created on the USB flash drive. To delete the User Audio files 001–100, perform “USB Delete” described on page 87. 7 To hear the recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button. New Audio file 3 As necessary, select the Audio file for recording target. If multiple Audio files are in the USB flash drive and the wrong file is selected by mistake, you can select a different file by using the dial. If you want to create a new Audio file, select “000 New Audio.” NOTICE • If you record to Audio file that contains previously recorded data, the previous data will be overwritten and lost. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 49 Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings This instrument has a Registration Memory feature that lets you memorize your favorite settings for easy recall whenever they’re needed. Up to 32 complete setups can be saved (eight banks of four setups each). 8 Banks Memory 1 Memory 2 Memory 3 Memorizing Panel Settings to the Registration Memory Basic Guide 1 Make the desired settings such as those for Voice and Style. 2 Press and release the [BANK] button to call up a Bank number on the display. Up to 32 presets (eight banks of four each) can be memorized. Memory 4 4 While holding down the [BANK] button, press one of the REGIST MEMORY [1] to [4] buttons to memorize the current panel settings. You can check the Registration Memory status in the MAIN display; Memory numbers that contain data light up, and a border appears around the selected one. Press and hold Bank number Bank number Memory number 3 Use the dial to select a Bank number. NOTE • Data cannot be saved to the Registration Memory during Song playback. NOTICE • If you select a Registration Memory number that already contains data, the previous data is deleted and overwritten by the new data. • Do not turn off the power while memorizing settings to the Registration Memory, otherwise the data may be damaged or lost. 50 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Memorizing Your Favorite Panel Settings Recalling Panel Settings from the Registration Memory 1 Press and release the [BANK] button to call up a Bank number on the display. Settings that are Saved to the Registration Memory Style settings* Style number, Auto Accompaniment on/off, Split Point, Style settings (Main A/B), Style Volume, Tempo, Chord Fingering, Smart Chord on/off, Smart Chord Setting Voice settings Main Voice setting (Voice number and all settings of the related Functions) Dual Voice settings (Dual on/off, Voice number and all settings of the related Functions) Split Voice settings (Split on/off, Voice number and all settings of the related Functions) Effect settings Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Panel Sustain on/off, DSP on/off, DSP Type Harmony settings Harmony on/off and all settings of the related Functions Basic Guide Bank number Other settings Transpose, Pitch Bend Range, Assignable Pedal, Portamento Time 2 Use the dial to select a Bank number. 3 Press one of the REGIST MEMORY [1] to [4] buttons to call up the panel settings you memorized. * Style settings are not available for Registration Memory when using the Song/Audio features. You can check the Registration Memory status in the MAIN display (page 23). DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 51 Backup Parameters and Initialization Backup Parameters The following data will be maintained even if the power is turned off and can be transferred then saved to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader as a single Backup file. For instructions, refer to “Computerrelated Operations” (page 8). Initialization This function erases the Backup data described above and Song/Style data, then restores all the default factory settings. As required, execute one of the following two procedures. Clearing Backup data Backup Data Basic Guide • Piano Room settings (Refer to page 25 for details.) • Registration Memory data (page 50) • Microphone settings (Refer to page 71 for details.) • Function Settings (page 72): Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Wireless LAN Volume, Metronome Volume, Grade, Demo Group, Demo Play mode, Demo Cancel, Panel Sustain, Master EQ type, Chord Fingering, Auto Power Off setting, Damper Resonance ON/OFF, Output Gain, I.A. Control ON/OFF, I.A. Control Depth, Audio Volume, AUX IN Level, Portamento Time, Assignable Pedal • Wireless LAN settings (page 77) In addition to the Backup data above, all the User Songs and all the Song and Style files transferred from a computer or loaded from a USB flash drive will be maintained even if you turn off the power. This operation initializes the backup data. While holding down the highest white key on the keyboard, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. Make sure to hold down the key until the message appears at the top left of the display. Clearing files in flash memory area This operation deletes all User Songs and all the Songs and Styles that have been transferred from a computer or loaded from a USB flash drive. While simultaneously holding the highest white key and the three highest black keys, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn the power on. Make sure to hold down the keys until the message appears at the top left of the display. To initialize Backup data, execute “Clearing Backup data.” To initialize data (excluding Backup data) transferred from a computer or loaded from a USB flash drive, execute “Clearing files in flash memory area.” NOTICE • Keep in mind that this operation also deletes the data you have purchased. Be sure to save the important data to a computer via Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 8). 52 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Reference Handy Performance Features Selecting a Reverb Type Selecting a Chorus Type The Reverb effect lets you play with a rich concert hall type ambience. Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the optimum Reverb type for the entire sound, you can select a different Reverb type manually. The Chorus effect creates a thick sound that is similar to many of the same Voices being played in unison. Although selecting a Style or Song will call up the optimum Chorus type for the entire sound, you can select a different Chorus type manually. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to call up “Reverb Type.” The current Reverb type is shown below. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to call up “Chorus Type.” The current Chorus type is shown. Current Chorus type Current Reverb type NOTE • Some Songs and Styles use Reverb Types which cannot be selected via panel operations. If such a Song or Style is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display. In such a case, you can select Reverb type 01 using the [+] or [-] button. 3 Rotate the dial to select a Reverb type. Play the keyboard to check the sound. For information about the available Reverb types, refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List. Adjusting the Reverb Level You can adjust the Reverb level applied to the Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the same operations above. Regarding the item in Step 2, refer to the Function List on page 73. Reference NOTE • Some Songs and Styles use Chorus Types which cannot be selected via panel operations. If such a Song or Style is played back, “- - -” is shown on the display. In such a case, you can select Chorus type 01 using the [+] or [-] button. 3 Rotate the dial to select a Chorus type. Play the keyboard to check the sound. For information about the available Chorus types, refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List. Adjusting the Chorus Level You can adjust the Chorus level applied to the Main, Dual, and Split Voices individually via the same operations above. Regarding the item in Step 2, refer to the Function List on page 73. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 53 Handy Performance Features Selecting a DSP Type DSP is an abbreviation of Digital Signal Processing. These range from reverb-like ambience effects to distortion and other dynamic processing tools that let you enhance the sound, or completely transform it. The DSP effect can be added to the Main and Dual Voices. Although ON/OFF status and type selection for DSP depends on a selected Main Voice, you can set these parameters manually. 1 3 Use the dial to turn DSP on. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display in order to check the DSP on/off status. Press the [FUNCTION] button. Appears when DSP is on NOTE • The volume of the currently playing Voice changes when turning DSP on or off. This is not a malfunction. The amount of change differs depending on the selected Voice. 4 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 5 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to call up “DSP Type.” The currently selected DSP type will be displayed. 6 Use the dial to select a DSP type. For information about the available DSP types, refer to the Effect Type List in the separate Data List. • The DSP type is an overall setting—only one type can be selected. For this reason, when you play a newly loaded Song or Style, for example, the currently playing Voices may not sound as expected. This is normal, since the Song or Style has its own DSP type which replaces any selection you’ve made before loading. A similar phenomenon occurs when you use the [FF], [REW] buttons or AB Repeat function during Song playback. Reference 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to call up “DSP.” The current setting is displayed. Adjusting the DSP Level You can adjust the DSP level applied to the Main and Dual Voices individually via the FUNCTION display. Refer to “** DSP Level” in the Function List (page 73). 54 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Panel Sustain Pitch Controls—Transpose This function adds sustain to the keyboard voices. Use it when you want to add sustain to the voices at all times, regardless of footswitch operation. The sustain function does not affect the Split Voice. The overall pitch of the instrument (except for the Voices with name “*** Kit”) can be shifted up or down by a maximum of 1 octave in semitone increments. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to call up “Sustain.” The current setting is displayed. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to call up “Transpose.” The current setting is displayed. 3 Use the dial to turn panel sustain on or off. 3 Use the dial to set the Transpose value between -12 and +12. Reference NOTE Current Transpose value • The sustain of some Voices may not be obviously or audibly affected when the panel sustain function is turned on. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 55 Handy Performance Features Pitch Controls—Tuning The overall tuning of the instrument (except for the Voices with name “*** Kit”) can be shifted up or down between 415.3 Hz and 466.2 Hz in approximately 0.2Hz or 0.3Hz increments. The default value is 440.0 Hz. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons to call up “Tuning.” The current setting is displayed. Pitch Controls—the PITCH BEND wheel The PITCH BEND wheel can be used to add smooth pitch variations to notes you play on the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward to raise the pitch, or downward to lower the pitch. You can change the amount of pitch bend produced by the wheel. Refer to “Pitch Bend Range” in the Function List (page 73). NOTE • The pitch may not be raised to the designated value depending on the selected Voice. • The effects produced by using the PITCH BEND wheel may not be applied to the Split Voice when the [ACMP ON/OFF] is ON. Current value Reference 3 56 Use the dial to set the Tuning value. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Handy Performance Features Touch Response Sensitivity The keyboard of this instrument is equipped with a Touch Response feature that lets you dynamically and expressively control the level of the Voices according to your playing strength. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. Selecting an EQ Setting for the Best Sound Five different master equalizer (EQ) settings are provided to give you the best possible sound. Master Equalizer is EQ processing that is applied to the overall sound (except Audio) which is finally output from the Effect block to the speakers or headphones. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button several times until “Master EQ Type” appears. The current Master EQ type is displayed. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button to select “Touch Response.” The current Touch Response sensitivity is displayed. 3 Use the dial to select one of the Touch Response sensitivity settings (1–4). When “1 (Soft),” “2 (Medium)” or “3 (Hard)” is selected, Touch Response is active. When “4” (Fixed) is selected, all notes will be played at the same volume no matter how strongly or softly you play the keys. Reference Current Touch Response sensitivity Current Master EQ type 3 Use the dial to select the desired Master EQ type. 1 (Normal) Flat EQ settings. 2 (Piano) Optimum for piano solo performance. 1 (Soft) With a soft touch, the instrument produces a loud sound. The volume level of tones tends to be consistent. 3 (Soft) Lowers the high range for a softer sound. 2 (Medium) Standard touch response. 4 (Bright) Lowers the mid range for a brighter sound. You must hit the key very hard to generate a loud volume. This allows for versatile expression, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones. 5 (Powerful) Features more powerful sound. 3 (Hard) 4 (Fixed) No touch response. The volume level will be the same regardless of how hard you play the keys. NOTE • “5 (Powerful)” produces a more punchy sound but may produce distortion depending on the Voice and Style, compared to the other Master EQ types. NOTE • The initial default Touch Response Sensitivity value is “2.” DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 57 Handy Performance Features Setting the Output Gain Level Speaker On/Off Setting Output gain level for the PHONES/OUTPUT jack can be switched among three values: one suitable for a headphone and the other two for a connected external audio device. You can set whether the sound of this instrument is always output from its built-in speaker or not when a plug is inserted to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button several times until “Output Gain” appears. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button several times until “Speaker Control” appears. Current setting Current setting 3 Reference 58 Use the dial to select the desired setting (below). Headphones Select this when using headphones. The output gain level is set to an optimum value headphones connection. When “Headphones” is selected and external audio equipment is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack, distortion may be produced. Line Out Select this when using external audio equipment. The output gain level can be adjusted by the [MASTER VOLUME] control of the instrument. Fixed Select this when using external audio equipment. The output gain level is fixed at the same level, regardless of the position of instrument's [MASTER VOLUME] control. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 3 Use the dial to select the desired setting. When “NORMAL” is selected the speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into the PHONES/OUTPUT jack. When “ALWAYS ON” is selected the speaker sound is always on regardless of whether a plug is inserted or not. Handy Performance Features Intelligent Acoustic Control (IAC) IAC is a function which automatically adjusts and controls the sound quality according to the overall volume of the instrument. Even when the volume is low, it permits both low sounds and high sounds to be clearly heard. IAC is effective only from the sound output of the instrument speakers. Although the default settings of IAC is set to ON, you can turn the function on or off. In addition, you can set the depth of IAC. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button several times until “I.A. Control” appears. Setting IAC Depth You can adjust the depth of the IAC effect. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button several times until “I.A. Control Depth” appears. Current setting Use the dial to set the desired value. The setting range is from -3 to 3. The higher the value, the deeper the effect. Reference 3 Current setting 3 Use the dial to turn IAC on or off. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 59 Voice Settings Selecting a Dual Voice Voice Editing 1 For each of the Main, Dual and Split Voices, you can edit the parameters such as volume, octave and depth of the Reverb and Chorus, allowing you to create new, custom sounds that best suit your musical needs. Hold down the [DUAL ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to call up the “VOICE SELECT (DUAL)” display. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons to call up the desired item. Main Voice parameters are indicated as “Main ***,” Dual Voice parameters as “Dual ***,” and Split Voice parameters as “Split ***.” For information about each parameter, refer to the Function List on page 73. 3 Rotate the dial to set the value. Check the sound by playing the keyboard. 4 Repeat Steps 2–3 above to edit various parameters. 5 If necessary, memorize the settings to the Registration Memory (page 50). The Voice-related settings are reset when a different Voice is selected. If you want to store the created sound for future recall, memorize the settings to the Registration Memory. Hold for longer than a second. Current Dual Voice 2 Rotate the dial to select the desired Dual Voice. Selecting a Split Voice 1 Hold down the [SPLIT ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to call up the “VOICE SELECT (SPLIT)” display. Reference Hold for longer than a second. Current Split Voice 2 60 Rotate the dial to select the desired Split Voice. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Style Variations—Sections Each Style consists of “Sections” that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the performance you are playing. Intro Ending Main Fill-in Intro This is used for the beginning of the performance. When the Intro finishes, Style playback shifts to the Main section. The length of the Intro (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. Main This is used for playing the main part of the performance. Playback of the Main section repeats indefinitely until another Section’s button is pressed. There are two variations (A and B), and the Style playback sound changes harmonically in response on the chords you play with your left hand. Fill-in This is automatically added before changing to Main A or B. Ending 1 Press the [STYLE] button, then rotate the dial to select a Style. 2 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. 3 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on. 4 Reference This is used for the ending of the performance. When the Ending finishes, Style playback stops automatically. The length of the Ending (in measures) differs depending on the selected Style. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Synchro Start on. The indicator flashes when Synchro Start is on. Synchro Start When Synchro Start is on, Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Pressing the [SYNC START] button alternately turns Synchro Start on or off. Appears when ACMP is turned on. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 61 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions 5 Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. 9 Current Section 6 Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. Now, you’re ready to start Style playback from the Intro section. Reference 7 Play a chord with your left hand to start playback of the Intro. For this example, play a C major chord (as shown below). For information on how to enter chords, see “Chords” on page 34. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. The Section switches to the Ending. When the Ending is finished, Style playback stops automatically. You can have the Ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the Ending is playing back. Synchro Stop When you press the [SYNC STOP] button to turn on this function, the Style will only play while pressing chords in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Releasing all the notes will stop Style playback. This makes it easy to add rhythmic breaks as you perform, simply by releasing your hand from the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Pressing the [SYNC STOP] button alternately turns Synchro Stop on or off. Split point Appears when the Synchro Stop function is on. Auto Accompaniment range 8 62 After the Intro finishes, play the keyboard according to the progression of the performance you are playing. Play chords with your left hand while playing melodies with your right hand, and press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button as necessary. The Section will change to Fill-in then Main A or B. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual The Style plays while you are playing the keys. Style playback stops instantly when you release the keys. Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Changing the Tempo Adjusting the Volume of the Style A Style can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. You can adjust the volume balance between Style playback and keyboard performance. 1 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to call up “Style Volume.” Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo display. Current Tempo value 2 Style Volume Rotate the dial to set a tempo. Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo of the current Style. You can change the tempo during playback by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button just twice at the required tempo. NOTE • The above operation applies also to Song playback tempo. Current value You can start play back of the Style or Song by simply tapping the [TEMPO/TAP] button at the required tempo—four times for time signatures in 4 (4/4, etc.), and three times for time signatures in 3 (3/4, etc.). 3 Rotate the dial to set the volume. Reference Tap Start Playing Chords Without Style Playback (Stop Accompaniment) If you press the [STYLE] button, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn ACMP on (the ACMP ON icon appears), and play the chord in the left hand range of the keyboard (with SYNC START off), the chord sound will be heard without Style playback. This is referred to as “Stop Accompaniment.” The specified chord will be shown in the display, and affects the Harmony function (page 31). DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 63 Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Setting the Split Point Setting the Chord Fingering The point on the keyboard that separates the left-hand range and the right-hand range of the keyboard is called the “Split Point.” When a Style is selected and ACMP is on, the notes played to the left of the Split Point are used to specify the chord for Style playback. When the Split function is on, the notes played to the left of the Split Point are used to play the Split Voice. The initial default Split Point is key number 54 (the F#2 key), but you can change it to another key. There are three different Fingering Types which let you specify the chord type for Style playback or use the entire keyboard range for chord specifying. 1 2 1 Press the [STYLE] button. 2 Holding down the [ACMP ON/OFF] button for longer than a second to call up the “Chord Fingering” display. Press the [FUNCTION] button. Hold for longer than a second. Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to call up “Split Point.” 3 Use the dial to select the desired setting. Reference 1 (Multi Finger) Recognizes the various chord types which are listed on the separate Data List, including “Easy Chords” (this book, page 34). 2 (FullKeyboard) Detects chords in the entire key range. Chords are detected in a way similar to 1 (Multi Finger), even if you split the notes between your left and right hands — for example, playing a bass note with your left hand and a chord with your right, or by playing a chord with your left hand and a melody note with your right. In this mode, Easy Chords cannot be detected. 3 (AI Fingered) Less than three notes can be played to indicate the chords (based on the previously played chord, etc.). Split Point 3 Rotate the dial to set the Split Point between 021 (A-1) and 108 (C7). Split point (54: F#2) Split voice Main voice To restore the value to the default setting, press [+]/[-] buttons simultaneously. NOTE • The Split Point set here is applied to both the Style and Voice. • During the Lesson playback, the Split Point cannot be changed. 64 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Style (Auto Accompaniment) Functions Looking Up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is useful when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. Playing range Chord Type range 1 Press and hold the [MINUS ONE] button for longer than a second to call up the DICTIONARY display. 2 As an example, learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. 2-1 Referring to the illustration, press the G key in the “Chord Root” range so that “G” is shown as the root note (no sound will be produced). Chord Root range Notation of chord Highest key Chord name (root and type) Individual notes of chord (keyboard) Reference To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. NOTE • About major chords: Simple major chords are usually indicated only by the root note. For example, “C” refers to C major. However, when specifying major chords here, make sure to select “M” (major) after pressing the root note. 3 2-2 Referring to the illustration, press the M7 (major seventh) key in the “Chord Type” range (no sound will be produced). The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Following the notation and keyboard diagram in the display, try playing a chord in the “Playing” range. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display will be highlighted. To exit from this function, press the [EXIT] button. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 65 Song and Audio Settings Background Music (BGM) Playback With the default setting, pressing the [DEMO/BGM] button will play back only Overview Demo Song repeatedly. This setting can be changed so that, for example, all internal Songs are played, or all Songs and Audio files on a USB flash drive are played back, letting you use the instrument as a background music source. Five playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs. 1 Hold down the [DEMO/BGM] button for longer than a second to call up the “Demo Group” display. The current repeat playback target is shown. 3 Random Playback The order of repeat playback via the [DEMO/BGM] button can be changed between numerical and random order. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons several times to select “Demo Play Mode.” The current playback mode, “1 (Normal)” or “2 (Random),” is shown. Hold for longer than a second. 2 Rotate the dial to select a repeat playback group from the table below. 1 (Demo) Press the [DEMO/BGM] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO/BGM] button again. Demo Play Mode Overview Demo Song Reference 2 (Preset) All preset Songs 3 (User) All User Songs 4 (Download) All Songs transferred from a computer All Song files (MIDI files) and Audio files in the connected USB flash drive. Playback Order Since the files in the root folder on a USB flash drive will be sorted in alphabetical order regardless of the file type, you can alternately playback several Songs and Audio files in order as in this example: 5 (USB) Song1.mid Song1.wav Song2.mid Song2.wav To do so, please make sure only the files to be played back are in the root folder on a USB flash drive and there are no other files in the USB flash drive. 66 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual When the “Demo Group” is set to “1 (Demo),” this parameter cannot be set. 3 Rotate the dial to select “2 (Random).” To return to numerical order, select “1 (Normal).” 4 Press the [DEMO/BGM] button to start playback. To stop playback, press the [DEMO/BGM] button again. Song and Audio Settings Tempo Setting of the Song This operation is same as that of the Style. Refer to page 63. Tap Start This operation is same as that of the Style. Refer to page 63. Song Volume Audio Volume NOTE • Audio volume can be adjusted while an Audio file is selected. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons several times to call up “Audio Volume.” NOTE • Song volume can be adjusted while a Song is selected. Press the [FUNCTION] button. 2 Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons several times to call up “Song Volume.” Audio Volume 3 Rotate the dial to set the Audio volume. Reference 1 Song Volume 3 Rotate the dial to set the Song volume. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 67 Song and Audio Settings Changing the Voice of the Song You can change the Voice of Track 1 or 2 in the current Preset Song temporarily to any other desired Voice. 1 Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button, select the desired Preset Song, then start playback. 2 Hold down the [VOICE] button for longer than a second to call up the “VOICE SELECT (MELODY R)” display for selecting a Voice. Pressing the [VOICE] button alternates the display between VOICE SELECT (MELODY R) and VOICE SELECT (MELODY L), then select the desired display. Melody R is the Track 1 Voice, and Melody L is the Track 2 Voice. Hold for longer than a second. Reference 3 68 Rotate the dial to select the desired Voice. As you select different Voices, the Melody Voice of the Song changes while the Song remains the same. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Specifying the Channel for the Lesson Part When using external Songs (only SMF format 0 and 1) in a USB flash drive (or transferred from a computer) for lessons you can specify which channels are to be played back as the right-hand and left-hand parts. The default settings are channel 1 for the righthand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. 1 Press the [SONG/AUDIO] button and select the Song (106–) for which you want to set the guide track. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button. 3 Use the CATEGORY [r] and [f] buttons to select the “Right-Part” or “LeftPart.” 4 Use the dial to select the channel you want to play back as the specified rightor left-hand part. Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance By connecting a microphone to the MIC INPUT jack (standard 1/4” phone jack), you can enjoy singing along with your keyboard performance or with Song playback. The instrument outputs your vocals through the built-in speakers. You can enjoy the three preset settings by just selecting one of them according to the particular circumstances and your personal preferences, or you can create your own desired settings and save them. Connecting a Microphone Before turning on the power of the instrument, set the MIC VOLUME knob to the minimum position. 1 MIC ON/OFF INPUT LEVEL 2 6 2 Select “MIC” by using the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button, then set it to “ON” by rotating the dial. Connect a microphone to the MIC INPUT jack. NOTE • Make sure to use a conventional dynamic microphone. 3 Turn on the power of the instrument. 4 Press the [MIC SETTING] button once or twice to call up the MIC SETTING 1 display. (If necessary, turn on the microphone.) Adjust the MIC VOLUME knob while singing into the microphone. Adjust the MIC VOLUME knob so that the INPUT LEVEL meter is not off the scale (or “pinned” continuously to the right). If the INPUT LEVEL meter is off the scale, distortion may be produced. Reference 1 5 Disconnecting the microphone Set the MIC VOLUME knob to the minimum position then disconnect the microphone from the MIC INPUT jack. NOTE • You can assign the function of switching the MIC ON/OFF to pedals. Refer to “Assigning specific functions to the pedal” (page 21). DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 69 Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance Selecting a Preset Setting 1 2 Press the [MIC SETTING] button once or twice to call up the MIC SETTING 1 display. Select “PRESET” by using the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button, then select the desired one of “STANDARD”, “BRIGHTER” and “LOUDER” by rotating the dial. Making and Saving the Microphone Settings This section explains how to make and save the detailed settings for the microphone. Only one group of settings can be saved to USER data. 1 Connect a microphone to the instrument, then press the [MIC SETTING] button once or twice to call up the MIC SETTING 1 or 2 display. MIC SETTING 1 display MIC SETTING 2 display Reference STANDARD The STANDARD setting provides optimum response over the entire frequency spectrum ensuring all vocals sound good. BRIGHTER The BRIGHTER setting emphasizes higher frequencies making vocals stand out more in the mix. LOUDER The LOUDER setting compresses the overall signal which increases both the level of your voice and softer sounds. If you want to make your original settings, set various parameters (including those on MIC SETTING 2) then save the setting as the USER data. For details, see next section. 70 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button to select the specific parameter to be adjusted. For information on each parameter, see below. 3 Set the value of the specific parameter by rotating the dial. Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance 4 MIC SETTING 1 display MIC ON/ OFF* Turns the microphone sound on or off. INPUT LEVEL Indicates the input level. PRESET* Calls up one of the preset settings (STANDARD, BRIGHTER and LOUDER) or the settings saved as USER. VOLUME Determines the output volume of the microphone sound. PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the microphone sound. REVERB Determines the depth of the reverb effect applied to the microphone sound. CHORUS Determines the depth of the chorus effect applied to the microphone sound. EFFECT SEND RESET Resets the values of parameters on MIC SETTING 1 and 2 displays to the default when one of the preset type is selected. When “USER” is selected, this resets them to the latest saved value. Press the [EXECUTE] button to save the settings. The save confirmation message will appear on the display. NOTICE • The Save operation will delete the previously saved USER data. NOTE • To cancel this operation, press the [-] (NO) button. 5 Press the [+] (YES) button to actually save the settings. 6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the MIC SETTING display. * The settings marked with * (asterisk) will be maintained even if you turn off the power. MIC SETTING 2 display NOISE GATE ON/OFF Turns the Noise Gate on or off. This effect mutes the input signal when the input signal falls below a specified level. TH. Adjusts the input level at which the (Threshold) gate begins to open. COMPRESSOR Turns the Compressor on or off. This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level. TH. Adjusts the input level above which (Threshold) the Compressor is applied. RATIO Adjusts the compression ratio. Higher ratios result in a more compressed sound, making soft sounds louder, but reducing the dynamic range. OUT Adjusts the final output level. EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands which can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. 3 BAND EQ Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band. dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB. Calling Up the Microphone Settings Saved to USER 1 Press the [MIC SETTING] button once or twice to call up the MIC SETTING 1 display. 2 Select “PRESET” by using the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button, then select “USER” by rotating the dial. Reference ON/OFF NOTICE • The settings here are lost if you turn off the power without executing the Save operation (See below). DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 71 The Functions The “Functions” provide access to a range of detailed instrument parameters such as Tuning, Split Point, Voices and Effects. Take a look at the Function List (pages 73–75). When you find the desired Function you want to change, follow the instructions below. 1 Find the desired item in the Function List on pages 73–75. 2 Press the [FUNCTION] button to call up the FUNCTION display. 4 Use the dial, the [+] and [-] buttons, or the [0]–[9] number buttons to set the value of the selected function. To restore the default value, press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously. In the sole case of the MIDI Initial Send function, pressing the [+] button executes the function while pressing [-] cancels it. Direct numeric entry. 3 Press the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons several times until the desired item appears. Reference Next item Previous item Current item 72 Value DGX-660 Owner’s Manual • Decrease value by 1. • OFF • Cancel Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. • Increase value by 1. • ON • Execute Some Function settings are maintained even if you turn off the power, and can be transferred to the computer as Backup Data (page 52). The Functions Function List Volume Function Range/Settings Default Value Description Style Volume 000–127 100 Refer to page 63. Song Volume 000–127 100 Refer to page 67. Audio Volume 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Audio file. Wireless LAN Volume 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Wireless LAN Audio. AUX IN Level 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the sound input via the AUX IN jack. Transpose -12–+12 00 Refer to page 55. 415.3Hz–466.2Hz 440.0Hz Tuning Pitch Bend Range Refer to page 56. Sets the range over which you can control pitch by using the PITCH BEND wheel (page 56), in semitone increments. 01–12 02 021 (A-1)–108 (C7) 054 (F#2) Refer to page 64. Touch Response 1 (Soft)/ 2 (Medium)/ 3 (Hard)/ 4 (Fixed) 2 (Medium) Refer to page 57. Chord Fingering 1 (Multi Finger)/ 2 (FullKeyboard)/ 3 (AI Fingered) Split Point Overall Main Volume Main Octave 1 (Multi Finger) Refer to page 64. 000–127 * -2–+2 Determines the volume of the Main Voice. * Determines the octave range for the Main voice. 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) * Determines the stereo pan position of the Main Voice. A value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Main Reverb Level 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Main Chorus Level 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Main DSP Level 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Dual Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. Dual Octave -2–+2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual voice. 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) * Determines the stereo pan position of the Dual Voice. A value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Dual Voice (pages 28, 60) Dual Reverb Level 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Dual Chorus Level 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Dual DSP Level 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the DSP effect. Split Volume 000–127 080 -2–+2 0 Main Pan Main Voice (page 27) Dual Pan Split Octave Split Voice (pages 28, 60) Determines the volume of the Split Voice. Determines the octave range for the Split voice. 000 (left)– 64 (center)– 127 (right) 064 Determines the stereo pan position of the Split Voice. A value of “0” results in the sound being panned full left; a value of “127” results in the sound being panned full right. Split Reverb Level 000–127 008 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. Split Chorus Level 000–127 000 Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Split Pan Reference Category DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 73 The Functions Category Function Range/Settings Default Value Reverb Type 01–42 ** Refer to page 53. Chorus Type 01–45 ** Refer to page 53. DSP ON/OFF * Refer to page 54. DSP Type 001–239 * Refer to page 54. Damper Resonance ON/OFF ON Refer to page 21. Sustain ON/OFF OFF Refer to page 55. MASTER EQ Type 1 (Normal)/ 2 (Piano)/ 3 (Soft)/ 4 (Bright)/ 5 (Powerful) 1 (Normal) Refer to page 57. Output Gain Headphones/ Line Out/ Fixed Headphones Refer to page 58. I. A. Control ON/OFF ON Refer to page 59. I. A. Control Depth -3–+3 0 Refer to page 59. Harmony Type 01–26 * Determines the Harmony type. 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect. Effect Harmony (page 31) Harmony Volume Assignable Pedal Pedal SUSTAIN, PORTAMENTO, MIC ON/OFF, START/STOP, TAP TEMPO SUSTAIN Refer to page 21. 000–127 064 Determines the pitch transition time (page 21). Higher values result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0” results in no effect. PC1/PC2/OFF OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when transmitting or receiving the performance data between the computer and the instrument (page 75). Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to OFF. External Clock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). When you record your keyboard performance to the application software on the computer via MIDI, set this parameter to ON. Keyboard Out ON/OFF ON Determines whether MIDI messages generated via keyboard performance are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB TO HOST terminal. Style Out ON/OFF OFF Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Style playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB TO HOST terminal. Song Out ON/OFF OFF Determines whether MIDI messages generated via Song playback are transmitted (ON) or not (OFF) from the USB TO HOST terminal. ON – Portamento Time PC (USB TO PC Mode HOST terminal) Reference MIDI*** Initial Setup 74 Description DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Press [+] to send, or press [-] to cancel during sending. This operation should be done immediately after starting the Recording operation on the computer. The Functions Category Metronome (page 29) Score Function Range/Settings Default Value Description Time Signature Numerator 1–60 ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. Time Signature Denominator 2/4/8/16 ** Determines the length of each metronome beat. Bell ON/OFF ON Determines whether a bell accent will be sounded (ON) or not (OFF). Metronome Volume 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Quantize 1 (1/4 note)/ 2 (1/4 note triplet)/ 3 (1/8 note)/ 4 (1/8 note triplet)/ 5 (1/16 note)/ 6 (1/16 note triplet)/ 7 (1/32 note)/ 8 (1/32 note triplet) – Depending on the Song data, you can make the score more readable by adjusting the timing of the notes. This determines the minimum timing resolution used in the Song. For example, if there are both quarter notes and eighth notes in the Song, you should set this value to “eighth note.” Any notes or rests shorter than this value will not be shown in the score. Right-Part CH 01, 02...15, 16, OFF CH 01 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is effective for Songs in SMF format 0 and 1 that are transferred from an external device. Left-Part CH 01, 02...15, 16, OFF CH 02 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is effective for Songs in SMF format 0 and 1 that are transferred from an external device. Song/Lesson Grade ON/OFF ON 1 (Demo)/ 2 (Preset)/ 3 (User)/ 4 (Download)/ 5 (USB) 1 (Demo) Refer to page 66. 1 (Normal)/ 2 (Random) 1 (Normal) Refer to page 66. ON/OFF OFF Speaker Control NORMAL/ ALWAYS ON NORMAL Refer to page 58. Auto Power Off OFF/5/10/15/30/60/ 120 (min.) 30 Refer to page 19. Demo Group Demo Demo Play Mode Demo Cancel Determines whether the Grade function is on or off. Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed. Reference Lesson Utility * The appropriate value is automatically set for each Voice combination. ** The appropriate value is automatically set for each Song or Style. *** For details, refer to “Computer-related Operations” (page 8). PC Mode The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). This setting is not necessary when transferring files between the computer and the instrument via Musicsoft Downloader. PC1 PC2 Local OFF OFF OFF ON External Clock ON OFF OFF Song Out OFF OFF OFF Style Out OFF OFF OFF Keyboard Out OFF ON ON NOTE • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from the instrument by the Song Out function, but User Songs can. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 75 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – To see where the connectors are located on the instrument, refer to pages 16, 17. CAUTION • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power of all the components. Also, before turning any components on or off, make sure to set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, damage to the components, electrical shock, or even permanent hearing loss may occur. Connecting an Audio Device (AUX IN jack) Connecting to a Computer (USB TO HOST terminal) You can connect the output jack of an external device such as portable audio player to the instrument’s AUX IN jack, letting you hear the sound of that device through the built-in speakers of the instrument. By connecting a computer to the USB TO HOST terminal, you can transfer data between the instrument and the computer via MIDI. For details on using a computer with this instrument, refer to “Computerrelated Operations” on the website (page 8). NOTICE • To avoid damaging the device, first turn on the power to the external device, then to the instrument. When turning off the power, first turn off the power to the instrument, then to the external device. USB TO HOST terminal USB terminal USB cable Instrument NOTICE • Use an AB type USB cable of less than 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. Stereo mini plug NOTE Reference • The instrument will begin transmission a short time after the USB connection is made. Audio device (portable audio player, etc.) NOTE • Use audio cables and adaptor plugs having no (zero) resistance. • You can adjust the volume of the sound input via the AUX IN jack from the external audio device. To do this, press the [FUNCTION] button then use the CATEGORY buttons to select “AUX IN Level,” then adjust the value by using the dial. 76 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual • When using a USB cable to connect the instrument to your computer, make the connection directly without passing through a USB hub. • For information on setting up your sequence software, refer to the owner’s manual of the relevant software. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – By connecting this instrument to a smart device, such as an iPhone or iPad, you can use apps on that device together with the instrument for a variety of musical purposes, take advantage of various convenient functions, and get more enjoyment out of this instrument. Make connections by using one of the following methods. NOTE • Before using the USB TO DEVICE terminal, be sure to read “Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal” on page 80. • Connect to the USB TO DEVICE terminal via the USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 (sold separately; may not be available in some areas). • Connect to the USB TO HOST terminal via the USB cable for iPhone/iPad. For details on connections, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website (page 8) and the “Wireless LAN Settings” (See next section). For information about the compatible smart devices and application tools, access the following page: Wireless LAN Settings By using the USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 (sold separately), you can connect the instrument to an iPhone/iPad via a wireless network. For general operating instructions, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website (page 8). This section covers operations that are specific to this instrument. Choosing the Connection Type You can use one of connection modes: Infrastructure or Access Point. Select one which is most suitable for your network environment. Infrastructure mode: The “Infrastructure” mode uses an access point for data communication, between the USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 and a network. Access Point mode: The “Access Point” mode allows you to directly connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 and your iPhone/iPad, without using an access point. Please note that when your instrument is set to Access Point mode, no Internet access is available on your iPhone/iPad, limiting part of their functions, such as mailing and searching. 1 Turn off the power to the instrument. 2 Connect the USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 to the USB TO DEVICE terminal of the instrument. 3 Turn on the power to the instrument. 4 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call up the FILE CONTROL display. http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/ Reference Connecting to an iPhone/iPad (USB TO DEVICE, USB TO HOST terminals) NOTICE • Do not place your iPhone/iPad in an unstable position. Doing so may cause the device to fall and result in damage. NOTE • When you use the instrument along with an application on your iPhone/iPad, we recommend that you first set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” then set “Wi-Fi” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication. • Certain applications may not be supported in your area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 77 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 5 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button to select “Wireless LAN.” Infrastructure Mode Network list NOTE • When “Wireless LAN” cannot be found even though the USB wireless LAN adaptor has been connected, turn the instrument off then on again. 6 Reference 7 Network list Press the [EXECUTE] button to call up the WIRELESS LAN display. “WIRELESS LAN - Infrastructure Mode” is the default setting. Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button to select the desired operation, then press the [EXECUTE] button. This operation lets you change the connection mode. For information on the WIRELESS LAN displays, see the next section. Connecting to a network by selecting from the list 1. Select the desired network by rotating the dial. 2. Press the [EXECUTE] button. For a network without a lock icon, this finishes connecting to the network. For a network having a lock icon ( ), the PASSWORD display appears. 3. Enter the password on the PASSWORD display by rotating the dial. 4. Select “Connect” by using the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button, then press the [EXECUTE] button. Connecting to a network manually 1. Select “Other” displayed at the very end of the list by rotating the dial. 2. Press the [EXECUTE] button to call up the OTHER NETWORK display. 3. Make SSID, security, and password settings by rotating the dial. 4. Select “Connect” by using the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button, then press the [EXECUTE] button. UPDATE Updates the network list on the display. WPS Connects this instrument to the network via WPS. NOTE • Make sure that your access point supports WPS. About the confirmation and changes in the access point settings, refer to the manual of the access point. NOTE • For information on entering characters for the password or settings, refer to page 83. 1. Select “WPS” by using the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button, then press the [EXECUTE] button. 2. Press the WPS button on your access point within two minutes. INITIALIZE 78 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Select your personal network from this list to connect automatically, or input the desired one manually. Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button to select this area, and then follow the instructions below. Initializes the connection setup to the default factory status. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – DETAIL Set detailed parameters from the pages below. Page 1/2: For setting the IP address and other related parameters. Page 2/2: For entering the Host name or showing MAC address, etc. Access Point Mode Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button to select the parameters, and then use the dial to set the value. After making the settings, select “SAVE” on page 2/2 by using the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button, and press the [EXECUTE] button to actually save them. Switches to the Access Point mode. Displaying the wireless network settings. INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default factory status. DETAIL Set detailed parameters from the pages below. Page 1/2: For setting the SSID, channel, security, password, IP address and other related parameters. Page 2/2: For entering the Host name or showing MAC address, etc. Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button to select the parameters, and then use the dial to set the value. After making the settings, select “SAVE” on page 2/2 by using the CATEGORY [r] or [f] button and press the [EXECUTE] button to actually save them. MODE CHANGE Switches to the Infrastructure mode. For information on making settings for/on your iPhone/iPad, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual” on the website (page 8). DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Reference MODE CHANGE 79 USB Flash Drive Operations By connecting the USB flash drive to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, you can save the data created on this instrument, such as User Song and parameter settings. The saved data can be recalled to this instrument again for future use. Precautions when using the USB TO DEVICE terminal This instrument features a built-in USB TO DEVICE terminal. When connecting a USB device to the terminal, be sure to handle the USB device with care. Follow the important precautions below. NOTE • For more information about the handling of USB devices, refer to the owner’s manual of the USB device. Compatible USB devices • USB flash drive • USB wireless LAN adaptor (UD-WL01) (may not be available depending on your area) Other USB devices such as a USB hub, computer keyboard or mouse cannot be used. The instrument does not necessarily support all commercially available USB devices. Yamaha cannot guarantee operation of USB devices that you purchase. Before purchasing a USB device for use with this instrument, please visit the following web page: Reference http://download.yamaha.com/ Although USB devices 1.1 to 3.0 can be used on this instrument, the amount of time for saving to or loading from the USB device may differ depending on the type of data or the status of the instrument. NOTE • The rating of the USB TO DEVICE terminal is a maximum of 5V/500mA. Do not connect USB devices having a rating above this, since this can cause damage to the instrument itself. Connecting USB device When connecting a USB device to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, make sure that the connector on the device is appropriate and that it is connected in the proper direction. 80 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual NOTICE • Avoid connecting or disconnecting the USB device during playback/recording and file management operations (such as Save, Delete and Format), or when accessing the USB device. Failure to observe this may result in “freezing” of the operation of the instrument or corruption of the USB device and the data. • When connecting then disconnecting the USB device (and vice versa), make sure to wait a few seconds between the two operations. NOTE • When connecting a USB cable, make sure that the length is less than 3 meters. Using a USB flash drive By connecting the instrument to a USB flash drive, you can save data you’ve created to the connected device, as well as read data from the connected USB flash drive. Maximum number of USB flash drive allowed Only one USB flash drive can be connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal. Formatting USB flash drive You should format the USB flash drive only with this instrument (page 82). A USB flash drive formatted on another device may not operate properly. NOTICE • The format operation overwrites any previously existing data. Make sure that the USB flash drive you are formatting does not contain important data. To protect your data (write-protect) To prevent important data from being inadvertently erased, apply the write-protect provided with each USB flash drive. If you are saving data to the USB flash drive, make sure to disable write-protect. Turning off the instrument When turning off the instrument, make sure that the instrument is NOT accessing the USB flash drive by playback/recording or file management (such as during Save, Delete and Format operations). Failure to do so may corrupt the USB flash drive and the data. USB Flash Drive Operations 1 Connect a USB flash drive to the USB TO DEVICE terminal, being careful to insert it with the proper orientation. A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the display to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Messages” on page 89 for an explanation of each message. 2 Wait for confirmation that the USB flash drive has been properly mounted. Mounting (Flashing) Calling up the FILE CONTROL display Pressing the [FILE CONTROL] button while the USB flash drive is connected to the USB TO DEVICE terminal calls up the FILE CONTROL display. You can access file operations listed below by pressing the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons from the FILE CONTROL display. Menu Format Reference page 82 Regist Save 83 User Song Save 84 Audio Save 85 Load 86 USB Delete 87 User Delete 87 Reference Connecting a USB Flash Drive If you press the [FILE CONTROL] button while an unformatted USB flash drive is connected to the instrument, the “Format” function will automatically be selected. Mounted (Lit) To exit from the FILE CONTROL display press the [EXIT] button. NOTE • No sound will be produced if you play the keyboard while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Also, in this state only buttons related to file functions will be active. NOTE • The FILE CONTROL display will not appear in any of the following cases: • During Style, Song or Audio playback. • During Lesson and Style Recommender. • While data is being loaded from a USB flash drive. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 81 USB Flash Drive Operations Formatting a USB Flash Drive The Format operation lets you prepare commercially available USB flash drive for use with this instrument. NOTICE • If a USB flash drive that contains data is formatted as described below, the data will be erased. Make sure that a USB flash drive to be formatted contains no important data before carrying out the formatting procedure. Reference 1 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call up the FILE CONTROL display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons to call up “Format.” 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-] (NO) button. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button again or the [+] (YES) button to execute the Format operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears, and the “USER FILES” folder will be created on the root directory in the USB flash drive. NOTICE • The Format operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 82 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the FILE CONTROL display. USB Flash Drive Operations Saving a Registration Memory to USB Flash Drive 1 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call up the FILE CONTROL display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons to call up “Regist Save.” A default file name will automatically be created. 4 Entering Characters The [-] button moves the cursor to the left, and the [0] button moves it to the right. Use the dial to select a character for the current cursor location. The [+] button deletes the character at the cursor location. Cursor left Cursor right Delete character The dial selects characters 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-] (NO) button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] (YES) button to execute the Save operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. Registration Memory will be saved in a folder labeled “USER FILES” which will automatically be created on the USB flash drive. To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash drive, use the dial or the [+] and [-] buttons to select the file, then skip ahead to step 5. NOTE NOTICE • Up to 100 User files can be saved to a single USB flash drive. 3 Change the file name as necessary. Reference This operation saves a Registration Memory to a USB flash drive device. The file name will have a “.usr” extension which does not appear in the instrument’s display. • If an existing file name is specified, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. NOTICE • The Save operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the FILE CONTROL display. NOTE • If you want to recall the Registration Memory (.usr) to this instrument again, execute the Load operation (page 86). NOTE Cursor • The amount of time it will take to perform the Save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash drive. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 83 USB Flash Drive Operations Saving a User Song to USB Flash Drive This operation saves a User Song (Song numbers 101–105) to USB flash drive. 1 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call up the FILE CONTROL display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons to call up “User Song Save.” The SOURCE FILE—a User Song name—will be highlighted. 5 Cursor Reference Use the dial to select the User Song you want to save. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The DESTINATION FILE parameter will be highlighted, and a default name will automatically be created. The name of the file to be saved 6 Change the file name as necessary. Refer to “Saving a Registration Memory to USB Flash Drive” on page 83 for filename entry. 7 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-] (NO) button. 8 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] (YES) button to execute the Save operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. The User Song will be saved in a folder labeled “USER FILES” which will automatically be created on the USB flash drive. The source User Song name. 3 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A cursor will appear below the first character in the file name. NOTICE • If an existing file name is specified, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. NOTICE • The Save operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash drive, use the dial to select the file, then skip ahead to step 7. 9 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the FILE CONTROL display. NOTE • The amount of time it will take to perform the Save operation will depend on the condition of the USB flash drive. 84 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual USB Flash Drive Operations Converting a User Song to an Audio file This operation converts a User Song (Song numbers 101–105) to an Audio file and saves the file to the USB flash drive. NOTE • Only User Songs can be converted to Audio files. 1 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call up the FILE CONTROL display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons to call up “Audio Save.” The SOURCE FILE—a User Song name—will be highlighted. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-] (NO) button. 6 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] (YES) button to execute the Save (Convert) operation. This operation starts playback and conversion from a User Song to an audio file. If you input audio signals via the AUX IN jack during conversion, that sound also will be recorded. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. The Audio file will be saved in a folder labeled “USER FILES” which will automatically be created on the USB flash drive. NOTICE • If an existing file name is specified, the display prompts you for confirmation. Press [EXECUTE] or [+] if it is OK to overwrite the file, or [-] to cancel. NOTICE • Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. The source User Song name. 3 Use the dial to select the User Song you want to convert. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. The DESTINATION AUDIO FILE parameter will be highlighted, and a default name will automatically be created. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the FILE CONTROL display. Reference 7 NOTE • The amount of time it takes to perform the Save operation depends on the condition of the USB flash drive. To Overwrite an Existing File If you want to overwrite a file that already exists on the USB flash drive, use the dial to select the file, then go on to the next step. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 85 USB Flash Drive Operations Loading Files from a USB Flash Drive Registration Memory, Style file and Song file (SMF) residing on a USB flash drive can be loaded into the instrument. 5 NOTICE • If you load a Registration Memory, data will be overwritten by the newly loaded data. Save important data to a USB flash drive before loading data that will overwrite it. 1 NOTICE • The Load operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call up the FILE CONTROL display. 6 Reference 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons to call up “Load.” 3 Use the dial to select the file you want to load. All Registration Memory files in the USB flash drive will be displayed first, followed by the Style files and Song files. Files must be located in the “USER FILES” folder in the USB flash drive. Files located outside of that folder will not be recognized. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-] (NO) button. 86 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] (YES) button to execute the Load operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the FILE CONTROL display. Deleting files from a USB Flash Drive Deleting User Data from the Instrument This procedure deletes Registration Memory, Style file, Song file and Audio file from a USB flash drive. This procedure deletes User Song files as well as Style and Song files loaded or transferred from an external device such as a computer. This operation does not erase the Preset data. 1 2 3 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call up the FILE CONTROL display. Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons to call up “USB Delete.” Use the dial to select the file you want to delete. All Registration Memory files in the USB flash drive will be displayed first, followed by the Song files, Audio files and Style files. Files must be located in the “User Files” folder in the USB flash drive. Files located outside of that folder will not be recognized. 1 Press the [FILE CONTROL] button to call up the FILE CONTROL display. 2 Use the CATEGORY [r] or [f] buttons to call up “User Delete.” Only “User Delete” can be selected if no USB flash drive is connected to the instrument. 3 Use the dial to select the file you want to delete. All User Songs will be displayed first, followed by the Song and Style files. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-] (NO) button. 4 Press the [EXECUTE] button. A confirmation message will appear. To cancel the operation, press the [-] (NO) button. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] (YES) button to execute the Delete operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. 5 Press the [EXECUTE] button again, or the [+] (YES) button to execute the Delete operation. After a while, a message indicating completion of the operation appears. NOTICE NOTICE • The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the FILE CONTROL display. Reference USB Flash Drive Operations • The Delete operation cannot be cancelled during execution. Never turn off the power or disconnect the USB flash drive during the operation. Doing so may result in data loss. 6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the FILE CONTROL display. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 87 Appendix Troubleshooting For the Instrument Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. The power is automatically turned off. This is normal and due to the Auto Power Off function. If necessary, set the parameter of the Auto Power Off function (page 19). When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. Noise is heard from the instrument’s speakers or headphones when using the instrument with an iPhone/iPad application. When you use the instrument along with an iPhone/iPad application, we recommend that you set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on your iPhone/iPad in order to avoid noise caused by communication. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a Style or Song is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a plug is connected to this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off setting (“Local”). (See page 74.) Is the FILE CONTROL display showing? The instrument’s keyboard, etc., will not produce any sound while the FILE CONTROL display is showing. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display. Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 65), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/STOP] button is pressed. Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to “External Clock” on page 74. The Style does not sound properly. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 63) is set to an appropriate level. Is the Split Point set at an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the Split Point at an appropriate key (page 64). Is the “ACMP” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. Appendix 88 No rhythm accompaniment plays when the [START/ STOP] button is pressed after selecting style number 174 or a style between 188–205 (Pianist). This is not a malfunction. Style number 174 and style numbers 188–205 (Pianist) have no rhythm parts, so no rhythm will play. The other parts will begin playing when you play a chord in the accompaniment range of the keyboard if the ACMP is turned on. Not all simultaneously played notes sound. You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony (page 90) of the instrument. When the maximum polyphony is exceeded, the earliest played notes will stop sounding, letting the latest played notes sound. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the opposite effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. The sound of the Voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the Voice may be slightly different from note to note. The appropriate display does not appear when the [SONG/AUDIO], [STYLE], or [VOICE] button is pressed. Is another display showing? Try pressing the [EXIT] button to return to the MAIN display, and then pressing one of the mentioned buttons. The ACMP indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Style-related function. The “Over Current” message is shown in the upper left area of the MAIN display and the USB device does not respond. Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. The Headphone sound is too low. Make sure the parameter of “Output Gain” is set to “Headphones” (page 58). DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Messages LCD Message Comment Access error! Indicates the failure in reading or writing from/to the media or the flash memory. Clearing all memory... Displayed while erasing all data in the flash memory. Never turn the power off during data transmission. Data Error! Displayed when the Song or Style contains illegal data. File information area is not large enough. Indicates that saving data in the media cannot be executed since the total number of files have become too many. File is not found. Indicates there is no file. File too large. Loading is impossible. Indicates that loading data cannot be executed since the file data is too large. Media capacity is full. Displayed when saving data cannot be executed since the media memory has become full. Memory Full Displayed when the internal memory becomes full during Song recording. MIDI receive buffer overflow. Displayed when too much MIDI data was received at one time and failed to proceed. Over Current Communication with the USB device has been shut down because of the overcurrent to the USB device. Disconnect the device from the USB TO DEVICE terminal, then turn on the power of the instrument. Save OK ? [YES]/[NO] Confirms whether saving is executed or not. Press the [+] (YES) button to save the recorded Song. To cancel saving, press the [-] (NO) button at the prompt. Save data is not found. Displayed when the data to be saved doesn’t exist. Since the media is in use now, this function is not available. Indicates that the file control function is currently unavailable since the media is being accessed. Since the recorded song has not been This message appears if you attempt to convert the User Song to audio file when saved, the operation cannot be performed. there is any recorded Song which is not saved. When this message appears, press the [EXIT] button to exit from the FILE CONTROL display, then save the recorded Song which is not saved. To save the Song, hold down the [REC] button until the save confirmation message appears, then press the [+] (YES) button. The limit of the media has been reached. Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the folder/directory structure has become too complicated. The media is not formatted. Indicates the inserted media has not been formatted. The media is write-protected. Indicates that the inserted media cannot be written since it is write-protected. Set to the write-protect switch to the “overwrite” position before use. The notation cannot be displayed, since this song is not allowed to display the notation. This message will appear if you attempt to display the score of a Song for which score display is prohibited. The song data is too large to be converted to notation. Indicates that the score cannot be displayed since the Song data is too large. This drive is busy now. This message appears when processing lags behind Audio playback or recording. This function is not available now. Indicates the designated function is not available since the instrument is executing another job. Appendix The number of files exceeds the system Indicates that saving data cannot be executed since the total number of files exceeds limit. Delete existing files to add new ones. the capacity. NOTE • Not all the messages are listed in the table; only messages needing explanation are included. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 89 Specifications Product Name Dimensions (W x D x H) Size/Weight Weight Keyboard Other Controllers Control Interface Display Panel Tone Generation Polyphony Voices Preset Number of Keys Type Touch Response Pitch Bend Wheel Type Size Color Contrast Score Display Function Lyrics Display Function Language Language Piano Sound Damper Resonance Number of Polyphony (max.) Number of Voices Featured Voices Compatibility Types Effects Reverb Chorus DSP Master EQ Harmony Intelligent Acoustic Control (IAC) Mic Effects Functions Preset Styles Other Features Compatibility Preset Songs (MIDI) Appendix USB Audio Recorder/Player Functions 90 Dual Split Panel Sustain Number of Styles Fingering Style Control Music Database One Touch Setting (OTS) Style Recommender Smart Chord Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Recording Number of Tracks Data Capacity Compatible Data Playback Format Recording Recording Time (max.) Playback Data Format Recording Registration Number of Buttons Memory Yamaha Education Suite Lesson (Y.E.S.) Demo Metronome Tempo Overall Controls Transpose Tuning Miscellaneous Piano Room DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Digital Piano 1,397 x 445 x 146 mm (55” x 17-1/2” x 5-3/4”) with keyboard stand: 1,399 x 445 x 761 mm (55-1/16” x 17-1/2” x 29-15/16”) 21kg (46 lbs. 5 oz.) with keyboard stand: 28kg (61 lbs. 12 oz.) 88 GHS (Graded Hammer Standard) keyboard Soft, Medium, Hard, Fixed Yes Full Dot LCD 320 x 240 dots Monochrome Yes Yes Yes English English Pure CF Sound Engine Yes 192 151 + 15 Drum/SFX Kits + 388 XGlite 1 Natural! Voice, 10 Live! Voices, 11 Sweet! Voices, 7 Cool! Voices GM, XGlite 41 types 44 types 237 types 5 types 26 types Yes Noise Gate, Compressor, 3 Band EQ Yes Yes Yes (Function Menu) 205 Multi Finger, Full Keyboard, AI Fingered INTRO, MAIN x 2, FILL-IN x 2, ENDING 320 Yes Yes Yes Style File Format (SFF), Style File Format GE (SFF GE) 100 5 6 (5 Melody + 1 Chord) Approx. 30,000 notes for 1 user song SMF (Format 0, Format 1), XF SMF (Format 0) 80 minutes/Song WAV (44.1 kHz, 16 bit, stereo) WAV (44.1 kHz, 16 bit, stereo) 4 (x 8 banks) Waiting, Your tempo, Minus one, Repeat & Learn, Chord Dictionary Yes Yes 5 - 280 -12 to 0, 0 to +12 415.3 – 440.0 – 466.2 Hz Yes Specifications Storage Storage and Connectivity Amplifiers/ Speakers Power Supply Connectivity Internal Memory External Drives DC IN Headphones/Output Microphone Sustain Pedal AUX IN PEDAL UNIT USB TO DEVICE USB TO HOST Amplifiers Speakers Adaptor Power Consumption Auto Power Off Included Accessories Approx. 1.7 MB USB flash drive 12V x 1 (Standard stereo phone jack) Yes (Standard phone jack) Yes Yes (Stereo mini jack) Yes Yes Yes 6W x 2 12cm x 2 + 5cm x 2 PA-150 or the equivalent 13W Yes • Owner’s Manual • Data List • Keyboard Stand • Footswitch • Music Rest • AC Power Adaptor (PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) *1 • Warranty *1 • Online Member Product Registration *2 *1: May not be included depending on your area. Check with your Yamaha dealer. *2: The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. Separately Sold Accessories (May not be available depending on your area.) • AC Power Adaptor: PA-150 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha • Headphones: HPH-50/HPH-100/HPH-150 • Pedal Unit: LP-7A/LP-7AWH • Foot Pedal: FC3A • Footswitch: FC4A/FC5 • USB wireless LAN adaptor: UD-WL01 • Wireless MIDI Adaptor: UD-BT01 Appendix * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the printing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. Since specifications, equipment or separately sold accessories may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 91 Index Symbols Functions ......................................72 R [-] and [+] buttons ........................ 24 H A Half Pedal .....................................22 Harmony .......................................31 Headphones ..................................20 Random Playback ........................ 66 Recording (Audio) ...................... 49 Recording (Piano Room) ............ 26 Recording (Song Track) ............. 46 Recording (Song) ........................ 44 Registration Memory .................. 50 Repeat & Learn ........................... 43 Repeat playback .......................... 40 Reverb .......................................... 53 Rewind ......................................... 40 Rhythm ......................................... 32 A-B Repeat ................................... 40 Access Point mode ................ 77, 79 Accessories .................................... 8 ACMP ........................................... 32 Assembly ...................................... 12 Assignable Pedal ......................... 21 Audio ...................................... 38, 66 Audio player ................................ 76 AUDIO SELECT display ........... 39 Auto Accompaniment ................. 32 Auto Accompaniment range ....... 32 Auto Power Off ............................ 19 B Background music (BGM) ......... 66 Backup .......................................... 52 Bank number ................................ 50 Bell ................................................ 30 I Infrastructure mode ................77, 78 Initialization .................................52 Intelligent Acoustic Control (IAC) ...................................19, 59 Intro ...............................................61 iPhone/iPad ...................................77 iPhone/iPad Connection Manual ..8 L Lesson ...........................................42 Lid position ..................................25 Load ..............................................86 Lyrics ............................................41 M CATEGORY buttons ................... 24 Channel ........................................ 68 Character entry ............................ 83 Chord Dictionary ......................... 65 Chord Fingering ..................... 34, 64 Chorus .......................................... 53 Compatible format ....................... 10 Computer ...................................... 76 Computer-related Operations ....... 8 Connection ........... 20, 21, 22, 76, 80 CONTRAST ................................ 23 Convert ......................................... 85 Main ..............................................61 MAIN display ..............................23 Main Voice ...................................27 Master EQ .....................................57 Messages .......................................89 Metronome ...................................29 MIC .........................................21, 71 Microphone ..................................69 MIDI .......................................44, 74 MIDI Reference .............................8 Music Database ............................33 Music Rest ......................................8 Mute ..............................................40 D N C Appendix Damper Resonance ................ 21, 25 Data List ......................................... 8 Delete (from flash memory) ....... 87 Delete (from USB flash drive) ... 87 Delete (User Song) ...................... 48 Demo ............................................ 38 Dial ............................................... 24 DSP ............................................... 54 Dual Voice .............................. 28, 60 E Effect ............................................ 74 Ending .......................................... 61 EQ ................................................. 57 F Fast Forward ................................ 40 File Control .................................. 81 Fill-in ............................................ 61 Footswitch .................................... 21 Formatting (USB flash drive) ..... 82 Function List ................................ 73 92 DGX-660 Owner’s Manual Number buttons ............................24 O Output Gain Level .......................58 Overview Demo ...........................38 P Panel settings ................................50 Pause .............................................40 Pedal unit ......................................22 Piano Reset ...................................27 Piano Room ..................................25 Pitch ..................................25, 55, 56 PITCH BEND wheel ...................56 Playback .......................................39 Portamento ...................................21 Power On/Off ...............................18 Power requirements .....................18 Practice .........................................42 Q Quantize ........................................75 S Save (USB flash drive) ......... 83, 84 Score ............................................. 41 Sections ........................................ 61 Smart Chord ................................. 35 Song ........................................ 38, 66 Song Book ..................................... 8 SONG SELECT display ............. 39 Speaker On/Off ............................ 58 Split Point .............................. 32, 64 Split Voice .............................. 28, 60 Stop Accompaniment .................. 63 Style ........................................ 32, 61 Style Recommender .................... 37 Sustain .................................... 21, 55 Synchro Start ......................... 33, 61 Synchro Stop ............................... 62 T Tap Start ....................................... 63 Tap Tempo ................................... 21 Tempo ........................................... 63 Time signature ............................. 29 Touch Response ..................... 25, 57 Track On/Off ................................ 40 Transpose ..................................... 55 Troubleshooting ........................... 88 Tuning .................................... 25, 56 U USB Flash Drive ......................... 80 USER FILES folder ........ 82, 83, 86 User Song ..................................... 44 V Voice ....................................... 27, 60 Volume (Audio) ........................... 67 Volume (Main Voice, Dual Voice, Split Voice) .......... 73 Volume (Master) .......................... 19 Volume (Song) ............................. 67 Volume (Style) ............................. 63 W Wireless LAN .............................. 77 WPS .............................................. 78 IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC. By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. (weee_eu_en_01) DGX-660 Owner’s Manual 93 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: +1-714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México, D.F., C.P. 03900 Tel: +52-55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP, Brazil Tel: +55-11-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: +54-11-4119-7000 VENEZUELA Yamaha Musical de Venezuela, C.A. AV. Manzanares, C.C. Manzanares Plaza, Piso 4, Oficina 0401, Baruta, Caracas, Venezuela Tel: +58-212-943-1877 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Edif. Torre Banco General, F7, Urb. Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Panama, P.O.Box 0823-05863, Panama, Rep.de Panama Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: +44-1908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Rellingen, Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: +41-44-3878080 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. Wrotkowa 14, 02-553 Warsaw, Poland Tel: +48-22-880-08-88 BULGARIA Dinacord Bulgaria LTD. Bul.Iskarsko Schose 7 Targowski Zentar Ewropa 1528 Sofia, Bulgaria Tel: +359-2-978-20-25 MALTA Olimpus Music Ltd. Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta Tel: +356-2133-2093 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe, Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: +31-347-358040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 CYPRUS Nakas Music Cyprus Ltd. Nikis Ave 2k 1086 Nicosia Tel: + 357-22-511080 Major Music Center 21 Ali Riza Ave. Ortakoy P.O.Box 475 Nicosia, Cyprus Tel: (392) 227 9213 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Viale Italia 88, 20020, Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: +39-02-93577-1 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki, Greece Tel: +30-210-6686260 SWEDEN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46-31-89-34-00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Denmark, Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH., 2860 Søborg, Denmark Tel: +45-44-92-49-00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Antaksentie 4 FI-01510 Vantaa, Finland Tel: +358 (0)96185111 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, 1361 Østerås, Norway Tel: +47-6716-7800 ICELAND Hljodfaerahusid Ehf. Sidumula 20 IS-108 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: +354-525-5050 CROATIA Euro Unit D.O.O. Slakovec 73 40305 Nedelisce Tel: +38540829400 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: +7-495-626-5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 AFRICA Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz Böl. No:3, Sanyer Istanbul, Turkey Tel: +90-212-999-8010 ASIA THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co., Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: +86-400-051-7700 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: +852-2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Private Limited Spazedge Building, Ground Floor, Tower A, Sector-47, Gurgaon- Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122002, Haryana, India Tel: +91-124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 135-880, Korea Tel: +82-2-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: +60-3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: +65-6740-9200 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co., Ltd. 2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd. Banqiao Dist. New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan Tel: +886-2-7741-8888 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: +66-2215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES http://asia.yamaha.com OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Vic. 3006, Australia Tel: +61-3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: +64-9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN http://asia.yamaha.com DMI12 HEAD OFFICE: Yamaha Corporation 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Department © 2015 Yamaha Corporation Published 10/2015 POGR*.*-**A0 Printed in Indonesia ZS39130